JP2019171146A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an attention degree to a game and amusement in a game for improving a game motivation of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that a touch operation performance is executed when a detection sensor detects that a touch operation to a prescribed region on a front side of a pattern display part is performed, in a touch operation reception period R1-R4, and a movable accessory performance in which a movable accessory member is moved, is executed between a standby position and an actuation position. The game machine restricts execution of the touch operation performance by not determining whether or not the period is the touch operation reception period R1-R4 for executing the touch operation performance, when object existence is detected by the detection sensor in actuation of the movable accessory member.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there is one in which an effect of operating a movable accessory member called a gimmick is executed as one of the game effects accompanying the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1). reference). Further, as a game effect, there is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by touching the front side of a liquid crystal display device in a gaming machine within an operation reception period (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-136430 A JP 2017-055586 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest and interest in games and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position) and is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). A movable accessory member (39) to be played;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for restricting execution of one of the first production and the second production in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
It is characterized by providing.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can raise the attention degree to a jackpot game and the interest of a jackpot game, and can improve a player's jackpot game willingness can be provided.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of a game board when the movable accessory member of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is in a standby position. The front view which shows an example of a game board in case a movable accessory member exists in an operation position. The front view which shows typically the detection range of each detection sensor of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st pending | holding command setting process performed by the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variable game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the change game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection pattern determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 22A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation data table indicating the relationship between the operation detection pattern and the operation status, and FIG. 22B is a touch operation data table indicating the relationship between the touch operation detection pattern and the touch operation status. The figure which shows an example. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17. It is a figure which shows an example of the table referred when a fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 23, FIG. 24 (A) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st stop symbol selection table, FIG.24 (B). FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation type table. The figure which shows an example of the production pattern classification table referred when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of a movable accessory member action | operation effect. The timing chart which shows an example of the operation timing of a movable accessory member, and a touch operation reception period with an effect pattern. The figure which shows an example of the movable accessory member operation | movement timing selection table referred by the movable accessory member operation | movement timing determination processing performed by the command determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the movable accessory member operation | movement timing selection table referred by the movable accessory member operation | movement timing determination processing performed by the command determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the movable accessory member operation | movement timing selection table referred by the movable accessory member operation | movement timing determination processing performed by the command determination processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the touch operation effect determination process performed by the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of a touch operation effect. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect selection table referred by the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect selection table referred by the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game effect process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed by the variable game effect process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed by the variable game effect process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 40A shows an example of a specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40B shows the specific effect determination table of FIG. The figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific production set. The front view which shows an example of the game board in case the movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention exists in a standby position. FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 41. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the display part of the sub movable accessory member of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. 46A shows an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation situation, and FIG. 46B shows the relationship between the sub touch operation detection pattern and the sub touch operation situation. The figure which shows an example of the subtouch operation data table shown. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect performed by the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect performed by the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect performed by the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the sub movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the variable game effect performed with the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the main movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the main movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed by the display part of the sub movable accessory member of the gaming machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the movable accessory member operation | movement timing selection table referred by the movable accessory member operation | movement timing determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the fake action effect of the movable accessory member performed with the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 10th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 11th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 12th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the continuous production | presentation of the movable accessory member operation | movement effect and touch operation effect which are performed with the game machine which concerns on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation | movement process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 14th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the game machine which concerns on 16th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on 16th Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, the first to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. FIG. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, other examples such as a spinning cylinder gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a ballball gaming machine are used. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an electrical decoration unit 27.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). This operation button 20 is an operation performed on the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined specific period in a variable game effect (notification game effect) executed in a variable game in which a lottery result in the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated to the player. It is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like executed as a trigger.

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player.

  Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the variable game effect.

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in one row. Used to guide to the game ball launching mechanism 32. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and include a variable game effect process (see step S1707 in FIG. 17 and FIG. 35) and a jackpot game effect process (see step S1708 in FIG. 17). A sound output effect for outputting sound is executed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the illumination part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs a lamp | ramp effect by lighting modes, such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first operating port 314, a second operating port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, An out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeder 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIGS. 4 and 5, the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 have openings through the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Is formed. In addition, on the back side of the game board 31, game balls can be detected individually corresponding to the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Entrance sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 7) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the player hits the right.

  The entrance sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, detection of a game ball by the ball sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The incoming sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensors that can individually detect incoming incoming game balls by other detection methods.

  Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the game ball can enter the second operation port 315 when the electric accessory 315 b is opened, and the game ball can enter the second operation port 315 when the electric accessory 315 b is closed. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable prize opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the variable prize opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening / closing door 316b is opened, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable prize opening 316, and when the opening / closing door 316b is closed, the game ball is restricted from entering the variable prize opening 316. The

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball into the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 is detected by the entrance sensor 314a or the entrance sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. And the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display part 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball to the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the winning sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and entering the variable winning opening 316. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big win lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and 16R probability jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, open / close execution is performed in which a round game (unit game) in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated five times until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls or more are won in the variable prize opening 316 A gaming state including a mode. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than the 5R jackpot game state, and more than the 5R jackpot game state. This is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed at a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol change display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 entering the ball. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper part or lower part, or the left part or right part of the symbol display part 341. The sub display unit may be movable between a position covering the symbol display unit 341 and a position not covering the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols having numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs, such as another character or a design, may be displayed between main symbols. In this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine main symbol types “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols vary along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the big hit lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R normal variation jackpot”, the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an active line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot Is done. The jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the active line, but is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination which is set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, for example, “777” symbol combination is arranged in an active line Is displayed, or a combination of the same symbols other than “777” is displayed on the active line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, a state in which symbol combinations such as “333”, which are set in advance as the symbol combinations indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot in the main symbols, are arranged on the active line is displayed. Alternatively, a state is displayed in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” and “333” are arranged on the active line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination other than a combination of symbols indicating a probability jackpot such as “222” or “444”, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are arranged on an active line is displayed. When the lottery result is “out”, a state in which different combinations of main symbols are arranged on an active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable game effect indicating a degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big hit, along with the change display of the main symbol in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, if a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R probability variation jackpot is given as a variable game effect. Or the suggestion effect which suggests that it is 5R normal jackpot is performed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, when a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R normal jackpot is given as a variable game effect. The suggestion effect that suggests that is. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

  Further, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first operation port 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when the act which tries to guide the game ball to the 1st operation port 314 illegally using a magnet is performed, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. Note that the magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable prize winning opening 316. Thereby, in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode, when an act of winning a game ball exceeding the upper limit number in the variable winning opening 316 is performed, the cheating can be detected.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 and on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the incoming ball sensors 314a and 315a and erroneously detecting the incoming ball of the game ball is performed, the illegal act can be detected. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 disposed in the upper right part of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays a lottery result as to whether or not to release the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern) with the winning of the through gate 317 as a trigger. In the 7-segment display 372, a change display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the first operating port 314 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, a change display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the variable display hold number N and the hold number M generated by winning the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

  Whether the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are touched by a player's operation on a specific area corresponding to the predetermined area on the panel 25, for example, in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Is to detect. The plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are not limited to a player's touch operation on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and the hand is held on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It may be possible to detect the movement of the player. As shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d include an upper left detection sensor 38a, a lower left detection sensor 38b, an upper right detection sensor 38c, and a lower right detection sensor 38d. Each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is, for example, an optical sensor. The optical sensor may be either a reflection type sensor or a transmission type sensor, but a diffuse reflection type sensor is preferably used. When a reflective sensor is used as each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d, for example, the presence of an object within the detection range is detected based on a change in the amount of reflected light received.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6A, the upper left detection sensor 38a is arranged at or near the upper left portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341, and the lower left detection sensor 38b is a lower left portion in the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341. Or in the vicinity thereof, the upper right detection sensor 38c is arranged at or near the upper right part in the periphery of the symbol display unit 341, and the lower right detection sensor 38d is in the lower right part of the periphery of the symbol display unit 341 or in the vicinity thereof. Is arranged.

  As shown to FIG. 6 (A), the some detection sensors 38a-38d differ in the range which can detect presence of an object, respectively. When it is determined that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, cross-hatching is performed in FIG. The presence of an object on the front side of substantially the entire region of the symbol display unit 341 can be detected. On the other hand, when it is determined that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the symbol subjected to cross hatching in FIG. The presence of an object on the front side of the central area of the display unit 341 can be detected.

  When it is determined whether or not an object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the object is detected by at least one detection sensor 38a to 38d among the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the detection range of the object. When it is detected, it is preferable to determine that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 provided with a so-called warp, two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d are used to prevent erroneous detection that a touch operation has been performed by the player with the game ball that has passed the warp. It is preferable to determine that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 on the condition that the presence of the object is detected by. Further, as in the present embodiment, even when the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A and covers the upper portion of the symbol display unit 341 at the standby position, the object is detected by the two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d. It is preferable to determine that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 on the condition that the presence is detected. Therefore, in this embodiment, when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it is determined that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341.

  Of course, when an object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the object may be determined to exist on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is present at the standby position, the presence of the object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, while the specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The presence of an object may be detected by some of the sensors. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and the movable accessory member 39 is located at a position different from the standby position (the operation position or the standby position). The presence of the object may be detected by a part of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d when the object exists at an intermediate position with respect to the operation position. Further, when some of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are out of order, the remaining detection sensors that are not out of order may be used to detect the presence of an object. In the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the power is turned on, each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d individually determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. It is possible to check whether or not 38a to 38d are out of order. Further, the operation chuck for checking whether each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d has failed can also be performed during the progress of the game. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, each detection sensor 38a determines whether or not an object exists based on the detection result of one of the detection sensors 38a to 38d. It is also possible to perform an operation check as to whether or not each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is normally operated by sequentially determining about .about.38d.

  Moreover, each detection sensor 38a-38d may be arrange | positioned not only in the periphery of the symbol display part 341 but in the peripheral part of the symbol display part 341, etc. Furthermore, the number of detection sensors may be one or more, and the number is not limited to four and may be other numbers.

  The movable accessory member 39 is located between a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) positioned above the symbol display unit 341 and an operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the standby position. It can move in the vertical direction along the surface of the symbol display unit 341. The operating position (see FIG. 5) is closer to the center of the symbol display unit 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). Further, the movable accessory member 39 has a higher coverage with respect to the surface of the symbol display portion 341 when it is in the operating position (see FIG. 5) than in the standby position (see FIG. 4). The movable accessory member 39 has a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape at the periphery. In the present embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged, and each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually. Each of the plurality of lamps 391 can be lit in a plurality of colors including, for example, white, yellow, green, red, or a mixed color thereof. In this way, each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually, and can be turned on in a plurality of colors. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, the lighting pattern, lighting color, Depending on the number of lighting, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the floating game, or to specify the lottery result. For example, with regard to the lighting color, the jackpot expectation can be increased in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and the rainbow lamp effect is executed by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and the lighting color. Thus, it is also possible to execute a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A in the standby position, but the lottery result in the big win lottery using the lamp 391 exposed from the opening 31A is a big hit. It is also conceivable that an effect suggesting the degree of expectation is executed. For example, in the present embodiment, since four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), a big hit expectation is expected depending on which of the lamps 391 is turned on. It is possible to suggest a degree. In addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is also conceivable to indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by an image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 26C described later).

  The movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. The gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Furthermore, the movable accessory member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member that can be transformed into two or more forms, and a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 but may cover the entire display screen. Moreover, you may comprise the center part of the movable accessory member 39 as an electrical decoration part which can be lighted and extinguished. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot or clearly indicates the jackpot by turning on or blinking the illumination part (see FIG. 26D described later).

  Such a movable accessory member 39 is controlled so as to operate in an effect or the like for showing a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a final effect indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit, and also as a chance-up effect for improving the expectation that the lottery result is a big hit. There are many cases. In addition, in the jackpot game, for the jackpot game, in addition to the promotion effect that clearly shows that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested in the variable game effect, It is also possible to operate as an on-holding villa confirmation effect for notifying that a holding game in which the execution of a variable game is put on hold includes a game in which a lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a that supplies driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detector 39b that detects that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Have The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operating position in accordance with the rotation direction of the motor 39a. It is moved downward or upward from the operating position toward the standby position. For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position by rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and conversely, the motor 39a is standby from the operating position by rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction. Moved to position.

  The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39 c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39 c controls the motor 39 a according to the control instruction from the sound lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39 c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 39 b and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5. The motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. Main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. The input / output I / F 42 is connected to ball sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball entering the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. Judging. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of fraudulent acts using magnets or radio waves based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Furthermore, an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42.

  Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is used in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 16 based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. Set in The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command include a lottery result, a variation pattern in a jackpot lottery for the increased hold, when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (the first hold command shown in FIG. 12). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the hold command setting process.

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 when the reserved number N or the reserved number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

  Note that commands other than those described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, the clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 causes a main timer allocation to be described later every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big win lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electronic role hold area 412c in the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the jackpot winning, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outage type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining a variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second working port 315 is in the electric role open state, and initial values of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set. And a normal initial value counter CIN2 to be used. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at a short time interval by the MPU 41 and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 during the big win lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the seven-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first operation port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is the jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in any of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operation port 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a variable type counter CS1, etc.) is individually provided for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 includes the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

  Therefore, it is executed based on the validity information stored in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game to be performed, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation port 314, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. Is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number in which the success / failure information is stored in the first to-hold areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number-of-holds N.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second operation port 315, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reserved number storage area NAB, the number of pieces of information that are stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 is stored as the reserved number M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operation port 314 is configured by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. In addition, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of success / failure information as winning histories of game balls to the second operation port 315.

  In addition, it can be considered as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common with the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and even in this case, up to a maximum of 8 It is possible to hold the success / failure information as the winning history. The storing process of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving the validity information stored in the. Specifically, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and there is no success / failure information in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the number-of-holds storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  It should be noted that the difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, it may be considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the success / failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The success / failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is shifted to the first reserved area REB1, and the third reserved The success / failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Particularly, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the big hit random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined according to a low / high probability mode (first notification gaming state) that is a normal gaming state and a high probability mode (second state) that is a probability-changing gaming state based on a winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411. Two types are set corresponding to the notification game state. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 9B is an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the low probability mode is two (0, 1) of the random number values 0 to 637. In the high probability mode, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 20 (0 to 19) out of the random number values 0 to 637. That is, the jackpot probability is 1/319 (2/638) in the low probability mode, and the jackpot probability is 1 / 31.9 (20/638) in the high probability mode, which is 10 times that of the low probability mode.

  Here, in the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, two random numbers (0, 1) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but may not be common. Further, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or entirely discrete values. Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C <b> 2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types of probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 10 from 5 to 14. Yes, the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 to 15-19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability variation big hit in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. In the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. That is, in the probability change short game state, the expected value of the game ball to be acquired when the lottery result in the big win lottery is set higher than the normal game state such as the normal short time game state or the normal non-short time game state. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the first operation port 314 that triggers execution of the first special symbol game by winning the game ball and the second operation port that triggers execution of the second special symbol game by winning the game ball. A separate distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type varies depending on whether the game ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, but the first special symbol It is conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability changing machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a kind-two-kind machine, or the like.

  Based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, “5R normal It is determined whether it is “big hit” or “off”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to a probability variation time-short mode which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. The probability change time-saving mode is continued until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the game is executed in the normal time reduction mode which is the low probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is low and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high after the jackpot game ends. The high-frequency support mode in the normal time reduction mode continues until the jackpot lottery of a preset number of times such as 50 times and 100 times is completed.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a jackpot lottery of a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) after the jackpot game at the time of probability change jackpot is completed. Is executed in the probabilistic short-time mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and then the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from a short time mode to a normal time mode or a low probability mode in a variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state and the high frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the variable display stop result displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of place. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of outliers, ie, reach other than before and after detachment where the final stop symbol is other than before and after the reach symbol, and complete detachment where no reach occurs. Here, FIG. 9D is a diagram illustrating an example of the detachment type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9 (D), the random number value that becomes the front / rear out of reach is 0 to 8, the random number value other than the front / rear out reach is 9 to 38, and the random number value that is completely out is 39. ~ 238. It should be noted that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game that wins a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, that is, a variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, “reach” indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to be between the start of the symbol change display in the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation degree, an operation on the operation button 20 by a player, or a specific area on the panel 25 A player participation type operation effect process in which the touch operation is reflected in the effect is executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed, or the display is reduced or enlarged.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented, for example, one by one within a range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination reservation area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 412c. For example, it is conceivable that the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Thus, by determining the variation pattern type, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), normal reach effect (first development effect), super reach effect (second development effect). ), A rough variable game effect type such as a special reach effect (second development effect) or the like is determined according to the change pattern type (change display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process, which will be described later, is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, or a deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be individually provided for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 9E, FIG. 9F, and FIG. 9G are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table. As shown in FIGS. 9E, 9F, and 9G, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is preliminarily set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R regular jackpot”, the MPU 41, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery When the result is “out”, the type of variation pattern is specified by referring to the out variation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9E and 9F, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach production pattern with a variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type) (see FIG. 24B). A normal reach production pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type) (see FIG. 24B). A super reach production pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect (see FIG. 27). Furthermore, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest change display time of 90 s as the change type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24B). ), A special reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect (see FIG. 27).

  As shown in FIG. 9 (G), in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 for each stop type at the time of deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear out, complete out). Correspondence relations with fluctuation patterns are defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of detachment is the anteroposterior detachment reach or the reach other than anteroposterior detachment, one of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely out of the range, either the variation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a reachless effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (See (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a change display time of 10 s as the change type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (See (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 27).

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “04”, the fluctuation display of the deviation pattern is displayed without the notice effect such as a character, a message, etc., and stopped at the symbol. Is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, the fluctuation display of the deviation pattern that stops with the symbol is displayed with a notice effect such as a character, a message, etc. displayed. Executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect that reflects the operation of the touch operation on the operation button 20 or the specific area of the panel 25 by the player is notified. Sometimes performed as a production.

  Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples illustrated in FIGS. 9E to 9G. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”. The normal reach production is performed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach production with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach production executed in the super reach production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”. One of the super-reach productions is performed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer variation time than normal reach production, the probability of winning a lottery in the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal reach production (expected degree), and wins more than the special reach production It is executed when the player is suggested that the probability (expectation) is low.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects to be executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”. One of the special reach productions performed is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, for example, an effect that develops from a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach production is executed when the player is suggested to have a higher probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot than the normal reach production or the special reach production.

  It should be noted that the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which an operation state for a touch operation on a specific area of the operation button 20 or the panel 25 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation in which a single operation is reflected in the effect. Player-participation-type operation effects such as effects, continuous-stroke operation effects in which continuous operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effects, and long-press operation effects in which the long-press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect May be included.

  When the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the big hit lottery is given. Input to the sound lamp controller 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” with a change pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot”. Any one of “A01” to “A03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “B03” is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “C03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 adds fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that it is out of front of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. One of the following is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in the above are determined. Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces a sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Turn off the light.

  Accordingly, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process for determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS 1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform the big hit lottery. In addition, since the details of the variation mode that is actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, a variety of variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. The effect display is executed.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as a sound used for a variable game effect, a jackpot game effect, and a lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The voice lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and thereby sends a command to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input, and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 when executing a later-described variable game effect and jackpot game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26, an electrical decoration unit 27, and a motor driver 39c. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 51 can operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) by controlling the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c, and obtain the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Further, the operation switch 20a, the upper left detection sensor 38a, the lower left detection sensor 38b, the upper right detection sensor 38c, and the lower right detection sensor 38d are connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20 and a touch operation has been performed on a specific area of the panel 25, and based on the detection result, the symbol display unit It is also possible to control the image game effect executed at 341, the operation effect of the movable accessory member 39, the sound output effect in which sound is output from the speaker 26, the lamp effect by the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 24B)), and An effect type (see FIGS. 25A to 25C) is determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23). In step S2207, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed. Is displayed, and 5R normal jackpot,

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, the symbols such as the main symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, the notice effect image, the reach effect image, the jackpot effect image, the off effect image, the touch operation reception effect image, the touch A plurality of types of images such as operation effect images are stored. Note that images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing, but also the change display time of the change symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71 and an input / output I / F 72. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the dispensing control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount of money that is lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip, for example. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 increases with an increase in the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 is prevented. In addition, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erase switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like when determining that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, descriptions of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like are omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process are described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball to any of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and these counter values reach the maximum values. In this case, the counter value is cleared to zero.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning a game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the launch of. In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is processing to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric combination 315b of the second operating port 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. If the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. It is judged that. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal symbol is won, and the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. It is judged that. When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate process, the MPU 315b opens the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win a game ball to the second operation port 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged in parallel.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operation port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the first operation port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106 if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes). On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 10, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 13). And the counter value of S1310) is stored, and the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the contents of the success / failure information before the success / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is determined as a jackpot success / failure determination target in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 14, FIG. 16). Confirmation is performed, and a first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operation port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the second operation port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S <b> 1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 10, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 13). And the counter value with S1310) is stored, and the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 in the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the success / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is the target of the jackpot success / failure determination process (S1408 in FIG. 14, FIG. 16) described later. The content is confirmed, and a second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 12, “first hold command” is read as “second hold command” and “hold number N” is read as “hold number M”. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or miss), a variation pattern, and the number N of hold. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON when shifting to the high probability mode in the gaming state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 13) in the main processing described later, whether or not it is in the high probability mode. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag that is set to OFF when transitioning to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 9B). Execute the determination of whether or not. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the big win winning based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 9A). Execute the determination of whether or not.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the success / failure information is stored in the third reservation area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 11, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 included in the success / failure information stored in the third reservation area RE3. The value is read. Of the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4, the reserved area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 11 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA. is there.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hold number N to the first hold command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 the corresponding information on the success / failure information is stored in.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of date, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  Note that the first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and the other is performed in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. After being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with this command, it is deleted. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 are executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 msec, for example, and the counter update process of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the process of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next cycle. The

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits an output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, if a command such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S <b> 1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. Although details of the variable game control process will be described later, in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a change pattern command necessary for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10, and the updates updated in steps S1302 and S1310 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of lottery lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the open / close door 316b for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (jackpot game) Execute as many as the type. For example, when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 executes the round game five times, and when the jackpot type is 16R probability jackpot, the round game is executed 16 times.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery results of the big win lottery in steps S1602 and S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 determines that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state having an open / close execution mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency with a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode when the predetermined state is satisfied. Transition to a normal short-time gaming state that is a support mode, a normal non-short-time gaming state that is not a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, or the like.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the short game state when the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, the normal time short game state is entered.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is made, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to OFF and sets the high probability mode flag to ON when the gaming state transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the promiscuous short gaming state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the short game state at the time of probability change to the jackpot gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. Stop display will be displayed. In addition, by the display control process, each LED lamp blinks for a predetermined normal symbol variation display time in the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37, and the pair of LED lamps are turned on and off depending on whether or not the normal symbol is won. This is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of the above. In the case of normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operation port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next main processing execution timing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing. If the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1308: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1308: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. Until the execution time of the next main process is determined during the remaining remaining time (step S1308: Yes), step S1308, step S1309, and step S1310 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1308.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game. If the game machine 10 is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process ends and the jackpot game is not in progress. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, in the game state transition process in the main process of FIG. 13, the presence / absence of the jackpot game is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot game state, and set to OFF when shifting from the jackpot game state to another game state. Judgment based on the big hit game flag.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed. If the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to Step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 16 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the variation game control is performed. This is determined based on the variable display flag set to OFF in step S1405 of the process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If the MPU 41 determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop display the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( In step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes). On the other hand, when either one of the hold number N and the hold number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the validity information stored in the hold storage area 412b. If the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a change display based on the success / failure information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the change game control process. Details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the holding number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0. If the holding number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number M of holds is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of holdings stored in the holding number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The success / failure information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success / failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the fourth reservation area REA4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is shifted when the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is shifted when both or one of the holding number M and the holding number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, the MPU 41 executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 because it can be determined that the hold number N is not 0 when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No).

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the success / failure information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the fourth reservation area REB4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the validity information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the pending | holding symbol displayed on the symbol display part 341 are changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and proceeds to step S1408 of FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to ON in the gaming state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 13 is set to ON. . When the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 counts the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the success / failure information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b based on the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 9B). It is determined whether or not the value is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1604, the MPU 41, based on the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 9B), the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the success / failure information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b. It is determined whether or not the counter value is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the determination result in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9E). Identify. Further, when the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9F). . Further, if the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is out of place, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the out-of-range variation table (see FIG. 9G).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  Note that, as described above, when the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating “5R regular jackpot” to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “B01” to “B03” with “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is 5R probability variation jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” added to the variation patterns “01” to “03” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the variation patterns “01” to “08”. A command is set in the RAM 412. Further, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, or complete out is included in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 sets the variation display flag to ON.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the time of start-up of the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of power failure, etc. Explanation of these processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S1701), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702), a touch operation detection process (step S1703), and a touch operation detection pattern in the sub timer interrupt process. A determination process (step S1704), a counter update process (step S1705), a command determination process (step S1706), a variable game effect process (step S1707), and a jackpot game effect process (step S1708) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button operation detection process, an operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. In step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. Thereafter, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation button operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation state of the last three operations at the 1 msec interval as the operation history of the operation button 20 is changed from the first operation detection flag to the third. The operation detection flag is stored in the RAM 512. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first operation detection flag. .

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining an operation state for the operation button 20 from an operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed. When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1902, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the previous operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1903, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1904, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued when the operation state of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. Then, the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued.

<Step S1905>
If the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S1905). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1906, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1907, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “off”, “on”, and “on” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (operation state). Therefore, the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S1908). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1910, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “on”, “off”, and “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (operation state). Therefore, the third operation pattern flag is set on, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set off (see FIG. 22A). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation end of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “off”, “off”, “off”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 22A). Note that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Touch operation detection processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection process, based on the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, a touch operation state with respect to a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected, and the symbol display unit 341 is detected. A process for sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories for a predetermined area on the front side (a specific area of the panel 25) (for example, the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 6C) is executed. In the gaming machine 10, when the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the front surface of the symbol display unit 341 is set at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of a touch operation by the player on the predetermined area on the side (a specific area on the panel 25) is determined.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second touch operation detection flag to the first touch operation detection flag. In step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third touch operation detection flag to the second touch operation detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the detection result of the presence of the object detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in the third touch operation detection flag, and the touch operation detection process ends. For example, when the presence of an object is detected in all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the MPU 51 has an object in a specific area on the panel 25 (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) ( Is touched by the player). On the contrary, the MPU 51 moves the object to a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the presence of the object is not detected by one or more of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. Is not present (the touch operation is not performed by the player).

  As described above, in the touch operation detection process, the processes of steps S2001 to S2003 are executed, so that the touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (the specific area on the panel 25) is the nearest 1 msec interval. Three touch operation states are stored in the RAM 512 as a first touch operation detection flag to a third touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as the third touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is stored as the second touch operation detection flag, and the previous touch operation is stored as the first touch operation detection flag. The operation state is stored.

[Touch operation detection pattern judgment processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection pattern determination process, a predetermined area (panel) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is determined from the touch operation history determined based on the first touch operation detection flag, the second touch operation detection flag, and the third touch operation detection flag. The touch operation pattern flag for determining the touch operation state with respect to (a specific area in 25) is set. The touch operation pattern flag includes first to third touch operation pattern flags, and a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) by a combination of turning on and off the first to third touch operation pattern flags. The touch operation state for can be determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 22B, when only the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, a touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) is performed. Can be determined to be continued. When only the second touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that a touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) has started. When only the third touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) has been completed. And when all the 1st-3rd touch operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it determines with the touch operation with respect to the predetermined area | region (specific area | region in the panel 25) of the front side of the symbol display part 341 not being made. it can.

<Steps S2101 to S2105>
As shown in FIG. 21, in steps S2101 to S2105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first touch operation detection flag for the previous touch operation detection process is set to ON, and the previous touch operation detection process. It is determined whether or not the second touch operation detection flag for is set to ON, and whether or not the third touch operation detection flag for the most recent touch operation detection process is set to ON.

<Steps S2107 to S2110>
In steps S2107 to S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first to third touch operation pattern flags based on the determination result of whether or not the first to third touch operation detection flags in steps S2101 to S2105 are on. Set on or off.

  Specifically, in step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second touch operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. . That is, the MPU 51 is configured to generate “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” touch operation patterns as three touch operation states for a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25). Since it can be determined that the touch operation state has changed from the non-touch operation state to the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (the touch operation has started), the second touch operation pattern flag is set. The first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22B).

  In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the MPU 51 generates the touch operation pattern of “on”, “on”, and “on” as the operation state for three times with respect to a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, Since it can be determined that the touch operation state for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (the specific area on the panel 25) is continued, the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, the second touch operation pattern flag, The third touch operation pattern flag is set to OFF (see FIG. 22B).

  In step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third touch operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the touch operation pattern of “on”, “off”, and “off” is generated as a touch operation state for three times with respect to a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 51 Since it can be determined that the touch operation state for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (specific area on the panel 25) has changed from the touch operation state to the non-touch operation state (touch operation has ended), the third touch operation pattern flag is turned on. The first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22B).

  In step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag, the second touch operation pattern flag, and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 generates touch operation patterns other than the above, such as “off”, “off”, and “off”, as the touch operation state for three times with respect to a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25). In this case, all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to OFF (see FIG. 22B). The MPU 51 determines that the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) is in a non-touch state when all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the counter update process (step S1705), the MPU 51 updates the effect pattern type counter, the variable display counter, the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, the specific effect type counter, and the like. Execute. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is being performed, that the fluctuation display on the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first to fourth touch operation effect type counters updated here are touches on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. This is used to determine the touch operation effect type executed by the operation. For example, the first touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 39, the second touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 59, and the third touch operation effect type counter The counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79, and the fourth touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The specific effect type counter updated here is the presence of an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the second to fourth touch operation reception periods R2 to R4 during execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect. Is used to determine a specific effect type to be executed instead of the touch operation effect. For example, the specific effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S1706), in the command determination process, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1706 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. If the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2201: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. It should be noted that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2201, and is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is subject to processing. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2203. If the received command is not a variation pattern command (step S2202: NO), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 24A) and a variation type table (see FIG. 24B) stored in the ROM 511 in advance, and the RAM 512. Based on the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (effect pattern) are determined. In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type Is 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed last. It is a design. The effect pattern type table includes the normal reach effect pattern type table (see FIG. 25A) in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27), and the final individual effect type in the variable game effect. Super reach production pattern type table (see FIG. 25B) which is a super reach production (see FIG. 27), and special reach production pattern type in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is a special reach production (see FIG. 27). A table (see FIG. 25C) is included.

  Here, FIG. 24A shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 24A, in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is determined. In FIG. 24A, the main symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), “777”. ”Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and a symbol combination other than“ 333 ”and“ 777 ”is a symbol combination indicating that any of the 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot It is assumed.

  When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 is “5R normal jackpot”, there is no distribution of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the main symbols other than “3” and “7” The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the symbol combination “333” or “777” indicating 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, there is no distribution of “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the symbol combination “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation big hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combination indicating 5R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combinations whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal jackpots can be stopped and displayed. And when the main symbol other than “3” except “7” is determined as the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, in the jackpot game that shifts after the end of the variable game, A promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” is executed.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, symbol combinations other than “777” that indicate 16R probability variation big hit can be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination other than “777” symbol combination indicating that the main symbol stop display result indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stopped. Can be done. If the main symbol other than “7” is determined as the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, the lottery result is “16R” in the jackpot game that is shifted to after the end of the variable game. A promotion effect that clearly indicates “probable jackpot” is executed.

  Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol determined previously. As a result, the combination of stop symbols to be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. Is done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 51 determines the information about the outage type selected based on the outage type table (see FIG. 9D), and first. A second stop symbol is determined based on the first stop symbol. For example, when the detachment type is front / rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined as the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined as a symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than front / rear detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is determined by the design. When the detachment type is complete detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 24B is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation type table. As shown in FIG. 24B, in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, a variation display command “A01” having a lottery result “normal jackpot” and a variation pattern “01” is associated with a variation display time “30 s” and a variation type “normal reach effect pattern”. The variation pattern command “B02” whose lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” and variation pattern is “02” is associated with the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern”. The variation display command “C03” having the lottery result “16R probability variation big hit” and the variation pattern “03” is associated with the variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern”. Further, the variation display command “D04” having the lottery result “out” and the variation pattern “04” is associated with the variation display time “7 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”. The variation display command “D05” whose result is “out” and the variation pattern is “05” is associated with the variation display time “10 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”.

  Furthermore, FIGS. 25A to 25C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect pattern type table. The effect pattern type table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 25A is a normal reach effect pattern type table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 25B is a variable game. FIG. 25C is a super reach production pattern table that is referred to when the final individual production type in the production is the super reach production (see FIG. 27). FIG. It is a special reach production pattern table referred to in the case of (see FIG. 27).

  In this embodiment, a case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but there may be six or more types of effects. In FIG. 25, the effect type table when the variation type is “no reach” is omitted.

  In the normal reach production pattern type table shown in FIG. 25A, the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter is determined according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and off). “Production pattern X1” to “Production pattern X5” are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects an effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. To do. Here, the effect pattern X1 to the effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type table is an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state after the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed is executed, for example. The final individual effect type is an effect that becomes a normal reach effect (see FIG. 27).

  Also, in the super reach production pattern table shown in FIG. 25B, “production pattern Y1” to “production pattern Y5” are defined as production pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Yes. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern Y1 to the production pattern Y3 included in the super reach production pattern table, for example, the normal reach production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and the expectation degree is higher than the normal reach production as the final individual production type. This is an effect that develops into a super reach effect that has a longer effect execution time than a normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). The super reach production pattern table may include a super reach production pattern production that develops into a super reach production after the high-speed fluctuation production is completed, without going through the normal reach production.

  Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25C, “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Yes. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is determined from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the end of the high-speed change effect, and the normal reach effect and the super reach effect as the final individual effect types. This is an effect that develops into a special reach effect that has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect and has a longer execution time than the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). Note that the special reach production pattern table may include special reach production patterns that develop into special reach production after the end of high-speed fluctuation production or normal reach production without going through at least one of normal reach production and super reach production. Good.

  Then, the MPU 51 stores, in the RAM 512, a display variation pattern command indicating a stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, and the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2204>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2204, the MPU 51 executes a movable accessory member operation timing determination process for determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 (the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect). In the movable accessory member operation timing determination process, the movable accessory member 39 at each of a plurality of operation timings based on the movable accessory member operation timing selection table selected according to the effect pattern type determined in step S2203. The presence / absence of the operation (the presence / absence of execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) is determined.

  Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of the movable accessory member operation effect. The movable accessory member actuating effect is executed as a chance effect effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big hit, or a confirmed effect (single announcement effect) that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot. The This movable accessory member operation effect is obtained by displaying the symbol shown in FIG. 26B from the standby position where the movable accessory member 39 does not hinder the visual recognition of the image effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 shown in FIG. This is an effect of returning to the standby position shown in FIG. 26 (A) after moving to the operating position which is the front of the central portion of the portion 341.

  In the movable accessory member operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 is stopped for a certain period at the operating position shown in FIG. At this time, in the movable accessory member 39, the plurality of lamps 391 provided in an annular shape at the peripheral edge suggests the expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big hit, or the lottery result is a big hit Is specified. For example, the jackpot expectation for the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is suggested by the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391. Specifically, the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391 are set so that the jackpot expectation is increased in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and the movable accessory member 39 is shown in the movable accessory member operation effect. While stopped at the standby position shown in FIG. 26 (B), the plurality of lamps 391 are lit with the lighting color of the jackpot expectation degree determined according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391 may include all of white, yellow, green, and red so that the lottery result is a big hit. By appropriately setting the color, it may be clearly indicated that the lottery result is a big hit by executing a rainbow lamp effect.

  Of course, regardless of the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of lamps 391 may indicate the big hit expectation or may clearly indicate that it is a big hit. In addition, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position shown in FIG. 26B, an effect effect for generating an effect around the movable accessory member 39 in the symbol display unit 341 may be executed. In the effect production in this case, the expectation degree of jackpot can be shown by the color and size of the effect, or it can be clearly shown that it is a jackpot.

  In addition, when performing the movable accessory member operation effect, it is also conceivable to execute a chance effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree using the symbol display unit 341. For example, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), before moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position, four lamps 391 arranged in a portion exposed from the opening 31A in the movable accessory member 39 are provided. Correspondingly, it is conceivable that an effect is displayed in which the symbol display unit 341 displays an image suggesting a jackpot expectation degree or future effect development on the symbol display unit 341. In FIG. 26 (C), “?”, “Chance” (suggested jackpot expectation), “reach” (directive development suggestion), and “severe heat” (big hit expectation suggestion) are displayed in order from the left in the symbol display portion 341. Is displayed. Then, in the movable accessory part 39, a roulette effect in which one lamp 391 is turned on after the four lamps 391 are blinked is executed. In FIG. 26C, the lamp 391 corresponding to “chance” is turned on to show the state.

  Further, when the roulette effect shown in FIG. 26C is executed, the expectation of jackpot is obtained by using the plurality of lamps 391 of the movable accessory member 39 by moving the movable accessory member 39 to the operating position. It is also conceivable to execute an effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit or a definite effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 26D, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested according to the number of lighting of the plurality of lamps 391 (the larger the number of lamp lighting, the higher the jackpot expectation degree), and all the lamps 391 are turned on. In such a case, it may be possible to make a jackpot finalizing effect. Hereinafter, an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit by a movable accessory effect may be referred to as a “single announcement effect”.

  In addition, when the effect which suggests a big hit expectation degree is performed by the number of lighting of the lamps 391 when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position (except for the one-announcement notification effect), the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. When returning, development effects such as a super reach effect and a special reach effect may be executed. In this case, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, the number of lamps 391 to be lit and the jackpot expectation indicated by the development effect (for example, the jackpot expectation of the development effect displayed at the start of the execution of the development effect). Or the number of stars shown). In other words, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, it is conceivable to suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect to be executed later according to the number of lighting of the lamps 391. For example, when the expectation degree for the development effect is indicated by the number of stars (for example, the number of stars is 1 to 5), when the development effect of three stars is executed as the development effect, the movable accessory member 39 is activated. It is conceivable that the number of lighting of the lamps 391 is set to three when in the position.

  Moreover, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, it may be emphasized that the effect is a confirmed effect by lighting the central portion of the movable accessory member 39. Then, when the single announcement effect is executed, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position, the change of the main symbol may be stopped at the rounded eyes, or the change of the main symbol is continued. Later, the main symbol may be stopped at a doublet. It should be noted that whether or not the change of the main symbol is stopped when the movable accessory member 39 returns after execution of one notification effect is determined by the relationship between the determined effect pattern and the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. Is done.

  In addition, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, it is also conceivable to execute an effect in which an image for generating an effect around the movable accessory member 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is conceivable that the expected degree of jackpot is suggested by the color or size of the effect or that it is a jackpot. For example, it is possible to clearly show that it is a big hit by generating a rainbow effect around the movable accessory member 39. An effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit by generating a rainbow effect around the movable accessory member 39 is also included in the “one-shot notification effect”. In other words, the “one-shot notification effect” is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit with the operation of the movable accessory member 39. The case where the jackpot finalizing effect is executed by the effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 in conjunction with the operation is also included.

  Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the touch operation reception period for the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 and the touch operation effect together with the effect pattern. First, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the touch operation reception period for the touch operation effect will be described when the touch operation effect determination process in step S2205 described later is described. Moreover, in FIG. 27, it means that the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern is not set in the effect pattern. For example, in FIG. 27, the operation timing G2 means that the non-reach effect pattern is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, six operation timings G1 to G6 are fixedly defined as timings at which the movable accessory member 39 can operate. Note that the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 does not need to be fixedly defined for all the effect patterns. For example, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 may be individually specified for each effect pattern type.

  The operation timing G1 starts immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect (immediately after the start of the main symbol fluctuation), and ends at the beginning of the high-speed fluctuation effect. That is, the operation timing G1 can be set for a non-reach effect pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, a super reach effect pattern, and a special reach effect pattern.

  The operation timing G2 starts immediately after the start of the normal reach effect and ends at the beginning of the normal reach effect. That is, the operation timing G2 can be set for the normal reach production pattern, the super reach production pattern, and the special reach production pattern.

  The operation timing G3 starts immediately after the start of the super reach effect and ends at the beginning of the super reach effect. The operation timing G4 is set in the middle stage of the super reach production. That is, the operation timings G3 and G4 can be set for the super reach effect pattern and the special reach effect pattern.

  The operation timing G5 starts immediately after the start of the special reach effect and ends at the beginning of the special reach effect. The operation timing G6 is set at the end of the special reach production. That is, the operation timings G5 and G6 can be set for the special reach effect pattern.

  In other words, the number of operation timings set for each effect pattern type varies depending on the effect pattern type. Specifically, when the production pattern is a non-reach production pattern, the operation timing G1 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation production. Note that the non-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which only a high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed immediately after the start of fluctuation is executed.

  Further, when the effect pattern is a normal reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timing G1, an operation timing G2 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the normal reach effect. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which a normal reach effect that does not develop into a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect.

  When the production pattern is a super reach production pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 and G2, the operation timing G3 of the early stage immediately after the start of the super reach production and the operation timing G4 of the middle stage of the super reach production are set. ing. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect are finished.

  Further, when the production pattern is a special reach production pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 to G4, an early operation timing G5 immediately after the start of the special reach production and an operation timing G6 at the end of the super reach production are set. ing. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect, the normal reach effect, and the super reach effect.

  Here, FIG. 28 to FIG. 30 are diagrams showing examples of the movable accessory member operation timing selection tables A to C, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table A shown in FIG. In some cases, it is referred to when determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table B shown in FIG. 29 is used when the effect pattern type is a super reach effect. Reference is made when determining the operation timing, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C shown in FIG. 30 is referred to when determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 when the effect pattern type is a special reach effect. The

  In FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, “◎” indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect), and “◯” indicates that it is a chance-up effect (a jackpot expectation suggesting effect). The accessory member 39 is actuated, “×” means that the movable accessory member 39 is not actuated, and “−” means that the corresponding actuating timing does not exist. In FIGS. 28 to 30, the case where the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table A that is referred to when the production pattern type is a normal reach production is, for each production pattern type (production patterns X1 to X5) of the normal reach production pattern, Whether to move the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether to execute the movable accessory member operation effect) according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. It is prescribed.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X1 and the lottery result is 5R probability variation big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timing G1, and the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the operation timing G2. That is, when the effect pattern X1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect in the normal reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X3 and the lottery result is out, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at any of the operation timing G1 and the operation timing G2. That is, when the effect pattern X3 is selected when the lottery result is out of the range, the movable accessory member operation effect is not executed at all in the normal reach effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table B that is referred to when the effect pattern type is a super reach effect is the effect pattern type (effect patterns Y1 to Y5) of the super reach effect patterns. In addition, according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, whether to move the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G4 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether to execute the movable accessory member operation effect) ) Is prescribed.

  For example, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Y1 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G3 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings. In G1, G2 and G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Y1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the super reach effect pattern.

  When the production pattern type is the production pattern Y3 and the lottery result is a 16R probability variation big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is activated at the operation timings G2 and G3 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operations. At the timings G1 and G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. In other words, when the production pattern Y3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member operation production is performed as a chance-up production immediately after the start of the normal reach production in the normal reach production pattern and immediately after the start of the super reach production. Executed.

  Further, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Y5 and the lottery result is out, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G1 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings G2 to G2 are operated. In G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not actuated. That is, when the production pattern Y5 is selected when the lottery result is out of the range, the movable accessory member operation production is executed as a chance-up production only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation production in the special reach production pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C that is referred to when the effect pattern type is a special reach effect pattern is the effect pattern type (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special reach effect patterns. Every time, depending on the lottery result in the big hit lottery, whether to move the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether to execute the movable accessory member operation effect) Or).

  For example, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Z1 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only with the operation timing G3 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operation timings. In G1, G2, G4 to G6, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  When the production pattern type is the production pattern Z3 and the lottery result is a 16R probability variation big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is activated at the operation timings G5 and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations. At the timings G1 to G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the production pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and at the end of the game. An operation effect is executed.

  When the production pattern type is the production pattern Z4 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is activated at the operation timings G2, G3, and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining At the operation timings G1, G4, and G5, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. That is, when the production pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation production is executed as a chance-up production immediately after the start of the normal reach production in the special reach production pattern and immediately after the start of the supermarket. Furthermore, at the final stage of the special reach production, the movable accessory member operation production is executed as a jackpot confirmation production (one-shot announcement production).

  Then, the MPU 51 determines the movable combination at each operation timing based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 and the movable accessory member operation timing selection tables A to C selected according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The presence / absence of the operation of the object member 39 (the presence / absence of execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) is determined. The operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in this way is stored in the RAM 512, and based on the operation timing stored in the RAM 512, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed during execution of the variable game effect.

<Step S2205>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2205, the MPU 51 executes a touch operation effect determination process. In the touch operation effect determination process, the reception period and contents of the touch operation effect are determined. The details of the touch operation effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. The touch operation effect may be determined when it is determined that the touch operation effect is executed by performing the touch operation within the touch operation reception period. In this case, the touch operation effect determination process in the command determination process is omitted, and the touch operation reception period may be determined instead of determining the touch operation effect in step S2205.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S1705 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is being performed based on the fluctuation display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the counter value of the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 displays a display variation pattern command for specifying the contents of the variable game effect including the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (effect pattern) and the touch operation effect in the symbol display unit 341. 6 to finish the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined in step S2203 and the contents of the variation game effect. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a main symbol variation image and effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the variation display and the effect display according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the variation game effect, Other effect means such as the movable accessory member 39 are caused to execute the movable accessory member operation effect, the sound output effect, and the lamp effect.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in this embodiment) until a preset variable display time elapses. Then, the variation of the plurality of main symbols is stopped and displayed in order. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next variable game or processing corresponding to the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, a game effect specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process after executing a process based on the other command received from the main control device 4.

[Touch operation effect decision processing]
Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect determination process executed in step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. In the touch operation effect determination process, a plurality of touch operations are performed based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and the value of the touch operation effect type lottery counter. The touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed during the touch operation reception period at each reception timing is determined.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 in which the movable accessory member operation effect or the touch operation effect is executed, it is mistaken that the touch operation is performed by the player because the movable accessory member 39 is activated during the touch operation reception period. May be detected. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (step S2202 of FIG. 23: Yes), the touch operation is performed after the operation timing determination process of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2204 of FIG. 23). An effect determination process is executed (step S2205 in FIG. 23). Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member 39, a reception period for executing the touch operation effect while avoiding the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in step S2202 of FIG. It can also be decided. However, determining the touch operation reception period while avoiding the previously determined operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 complicates the control process and restricts the touch operation reception period (touch operation effect execution period). Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is determined without considering the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in advance.

  Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a touch operation effect. Specifically, FIG. 32A is a diagram illustrating an example of the touch operation effect A in which the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates that it is during the touch operation reception period is not executed, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the touch operation effect B in which the operation reception effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (A) (FIGS. 32 (A1) to (A3)), the touch operation effect A in which the touch operation reception effect is not executed is a so-called back button effect and is touched internally by the gaming machine 10. When a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the operation reception period, for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of time. is there. The touch operation effect A may be an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, or may be an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the touch operation effect A may be repeatedly executed when a plurality of touch operations are performed during the touch operation reception period, or is executed only for the first touch operation. It may not be executed by subsequent touch operations.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the touch operation effect B is executed to clearly indicate that the touch operation effect B is during the touch operation acceptance period. In the present embodiment, as a touch operation reception effect, a touch operation reception image (characters “touch the screen”) that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Further, in the touch operation effect B, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) while the touch operation reception image is displayed (touch operation reception period). For example, this is an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of time. The touch operation effect B may be an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and may be an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. It is preferable that the effect is to suggest or clearly indicate the lottery result in the lottery. Further, the touch operation effect B may be repeatedly executed when there are a plurality of touch operations during the touch operation reception period, or is executed only for the first touch operation, and the second time. Although it may not be executed by a subsequent touch operation, it is preferably executed only for the first touch operation.

  When the touch operation effect A or the touch operation effect B is executed as an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree), for example, a predetermined region (panel 25 on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) The degree of expectation is suggested based on the type of image displayed when a touch operation is performed on the specific area), and the jackpot is clearly indicated. The touch operation effect may be executed as a sound output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the illumination unit 27, and a touch operation is performed by combining two or more of the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27. An effect may be executed. In addition, when a touch operation effect is executed in a sound output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the electrical decoration unit 27, these effects may be executed as effects that suggest a jackpot expectation.

  Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 and the touch operation reception period together with the effect pattern as described above, and the touch operation reception period will be described with reference to FIG. . As shown in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are fixedly defined. The touch operation reception period does not need to be fixedly defined for all the production patterns, and for example, the touch operation reception period may be individually defined for each production pattern type.

  In FIG. 27, in the effect pattern in which the final individual effect ends in the middle of the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2, the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2. Means that is not set. For example, in the non-reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, it is described that the high-speed fluctuation effect that is the final individual effect ends in the middle of the first touch operation reception period R1, and the first touch operation reception period R1 is Means not set. Similarly, in the normal reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, it is described that the normal reach effect as the final individual effect ends in the middle of the second touch operation reception period R2, and the second touch operation reception period R2 is set. Means not. Of course, in FIG. 27, the touch operation acceptance period defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern means that the effect pattern is not set.

  The first touch operation reception period R1 and the second touch operation reception period R2 are periods during which a touch operation with respect to the touch operation effect A (see 32 (A)) is received. From the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4. It is also set to a relatively long time. The first touch operation acceptance period R1 is a period that continues from immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect until the middle stage of the normal reach effect. The first touch operation reception period R1 is set for the normal reach effect pattern (X1 to X3), the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3), and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). In addition, the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39 are set in the first touch operation reception period R1. On the other hand, the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is a period that continues from the first touch operation acceptance period R1 and continues from the middle stage of the normal reach production to the early stage of the super reach production. The second touch operation reception period R2 is set for the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). In the second touch operation reception period R2, the operation timing G3 of the movable accessory member 39 is set. Note that the second touch operation reception period R2 does not have to be continuous with the first touch operation reception period R1, and may be separated from the first touch operation reception period R1.

  The third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 are periods in which a touch operation for the touch operation effect B (see 32 (B)) is received. The third touch operation reception period R3 is set in the middle stage of the super reach effect, and is set for the super reach effect pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The third touch operation reception period R3 partially overlaps with the operation timing G4 of the movable accessory member 39. Specifically, the third touch operation reception period R3 starts at the operation timing G4 and ends after a certain time after the operation timing G4 ends. On the other hand, the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is set immediately after the start of the special reach effect, and is set for the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The fourth touch operation reception period R4 overlaps with a part of the operation timing G5 of the movable accessory member 39. Specifically, the fourth touch operation reception period R4 starts at the same time as the operation timing G5 and ends in the middle of the operation timing G5.

  Here, FIG.33 and FIG.34 is a figure which shows an example of a touch operation effect selection table. The touch operation effect selection table is for selecting a touch operation effect to be executed when a touch operation is performed during the touch operation reception period, and is referred to in the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. In FIGS. 33 and 34, the expectation level (the jackpot expectation degree) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit for the touch operation effect is shown at the same time.

  FIG. 33A shows a touch operation executed when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32A). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation effect selection table A1 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table A, “touch” is selected as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability change big hit, 16R probability change big hit, and off). “Operation effects A1-1” to “Touch operation effects A1-4” and “No touch operation effects” are set.

  “Touch operation effect A1-1” has a “very low” expectation level for jackpots, “Touch operation effect A1-2” has a “low” expectation level for jackpots, and “touch operation effect A1-3” is a expectation for jackpots The degree is “medium”, and “touch operation effect A1-4” has a high jackpot expectation degree of “high”. In “no touch operation effect”, the touch operation effect is not executed even when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1. If the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1, the lottery selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is 5R normal big hit or miss, when the production patterns X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the production pattern types, the counter value of the first touch operation production type counter Is 0 to 19, it is decided not to execute the touch operation effect. If the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the touch operation effect A1- 1 is determined, and if the count value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 39, the touch operation effect A1-2 having the jackpot expectation degree “low” is determined.

  In addition, when the lottery result is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, when the rendering patterns X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, Z1 to Z3 are selected as the rendering pattern types, the counter value of the first touch operation rendering type counter is If it is 0 to 19, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the touch operation effect A1-1 having the jackpot expectation degree of “extremely low”. Is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 37, the touch operation effect A1-2 having the jackpot expectation degree “low” is determined, and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is determined. Is 38, the touch operation effect A1-3 with the jackpot expectation degree “medium” is determined, and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is If the 9 jackpot expected degree of touch operation director A1-4 is a "high" is determined.

  That is, in the first touch operation reception period R1, a touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation level is basically determined, regardless of the lottery result, with no touch operation or having a jackpot expectation level of “extremely low” or “low”. When the lottery result is a probable big hit, a touch operation effect with a medium probability or a high hit probability is determined with a low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1 of the high-speed fluctuation effect, the touch operation as the back button effect is performed except when the lottery result is selected with a low probability in the case of the big win. As an effect, a touch operation effect with a high expectation level for jackpots is difficult to execute. Therefore, in the first touch operation reception period R1 in the high-speed fluctuation effect, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation.

  FIG. 33B shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32A). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation effect selection table A2 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table A2, “touch” is selected as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit, 16R probability big hit, and off). “Operation effects A2-1” to “Touch operation effects A2-4” and “No touch operation effects” are set.

  “Touch operation effect A2-1” has a “low” jackpot expectation level, “touch operation effect A2-2” has a “middle” expectation level, and “touch operation effect A3-3” has a jackpot expectation level. Is “high”, and “touch operation effect A2-4” is “big hit confirmed”. In “no touch operation effect”, the touch operation effect is not executed even when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2. When the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2, the lottery selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

  Specifically, when the effect pattern Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types when the lottery result is 5R normal big hit or miss, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 29. Is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 49, the touch operation effect A2-1 having the jackpot expectation degree “low” is determined, If the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 50 to 59, the touch operation effect A2-2 having a big hit expectation degree of “medium” is determined.

  Further, when the lottery result is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, when the performance patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the performance pattern types, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19 If there is, it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, the touch operation effect A2-1 having a low jackpot expectation degree is determined, If the counter value of the 2-touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 54, the touch operation effect A2-2 having a big hit expectation degree of “medium” is determined, and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 55 to 57. If there is, the touch operation effect A2-3 having a high jackpot expectation degree is determined, and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 58,5. If the touch operation director A2-4 is a "big hit confirmation" is determined.

  In other words, in the second touch operation reception period R2, a touch operation effect having a relatively low jackpot expectation level, which basically has no touch operation or has a low jackpot expectation level of “low” or “medium”, regardless of the lottery result. If the lottery result is determined to be a promiscuous jackpot, a touch operation effect with a high probability of jackpot expectation of “high” or “determined jackpot” is determined with a low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the second reach operation reception period R2 of the normal reach production and the super reach production, the back button production is performed except when the lottery result is selected with a low probability when it is a big hit. As a touch operation effect, it is difficult to execute a touch operation effect with a high expectation level for jackpots including confirmation of a jackpot. For this reason, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation even in the second touch operation reception period R2 of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, except for the case where the touch operation effect that determines the jackpot is executed.

  FIG. 34A shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32B). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation effect selection table B1 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, “touch” is selected as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit, 16R probability big hit, and off). "Operation effects B1-1" to "Touch operation effects B1-5" are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, “no touch operation effect” is not set, and the touch operation is always performed in the third touch operation reception period R3, so that “touch operation effects B1-1” to “touch” are always performed. One of the touch operation effects “operation effect B1-5” is executed.

  “Touch operation effect B1-1” has a “low” jackpot expectation level, “touch operation effect B1-2” has a “middle” expectation level, and “touch operation effect B1-3” has a jackpot expectation level. Is “high”, “touch operation effect B1-4” has a jackpot expectation of “extremely high”, and “touch operation effect B1-5” is “successful jackpot determination”. When the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3, the lottery selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

  Specifically, when the effect pattern Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types when the lottery result is 5R normal big hit or miss, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 39. If the touch operation effect B1-1 having the jackpot expectation level “low” is determined, and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation effect having the medium jackpot expectation level “medium” is determined. If the effect B1-2 is determined and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 70 to 79, the touch operation effect B1-3 having a high jackpot expectation level is determined.

  In addition, when the lottery result is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, when the performance patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the performance pattern types, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19 If there is a touch operation effect B1-1 having a jackpot expectation degree of “low”, and a counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, a touch operation effect having a medium hit expectation degree of “medium” is determined. If B1-2 is determined and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation effect B1-3 having a high jackpot expectation level is determined, and the third touch operation effect type counter is determined. If the counter value of 70 to 77 is 70 to 77, the touch operation effect B1-4 with a big hit expectation degree of “extremely high” is determined, and the third touch operation effect type counter If the counter value is 78, 79 touch operation director B1-5 is a "big hit confirmation" is determined.

  That is, in the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation effect having a jackpot expectation level of “high” or higher is relatively easy to select, and particularly when the lottery result is a probable jackpot, the jackpot expectation level is “high”. The touch operation effect as described above is easily selected. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3 of the super reach effect, the touch operation effect with the jackpot expectation degree of “high” or more is relatively easily executed, and the lottery result is particularly changed. In the case of a big hit, it is easy to execute a touch operation effect whose expected degree of big hit is “high” or higher. Therefore, in the third touch operation reception period R3 of the super reach effect, it becomes easier to predict the lottery result by the touch operation than in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the second touch operation reception period R2 for the touch operation effect A.

  FIG. 34B shows a touch operation executed when a touch operation is performed in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32B). It is a figure which shows an example of touch operation effect selection table B2 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, “touch” is selected as the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit, 16R probability big hit, and off). “Operation effects B2-1” to “Touch operation effects B2-5” are set. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, “no touch operation effect” is not set, and the touch operation is always performed in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, so that “touch operation effects B2-1” to “touch” are always performed. One of the touch operation effects “operation effect B2-5” is executed.

  “Touch operation effect B2-1” has a “low” jackpot expectation level, “touch operation effect B2-2” has a “big” expectation level, and “touch operation effect B2-3” has a jackpot expectation level Is “high”, “touch operation effect B2-4” has a jackpot expectation of “extremely high”, and “touch operation effect B2-5” is “successful jackpot determination”. When the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the lottery selects the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter. Select according to.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is 5R normal big hit or miss, and the production patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the production pattern types, the big win is given if the counter value of the fourth touch operation production type counter is 0 to 59. When the touch operation effect B2-1 with the expectation level “low” is determined and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 89, the touch operation effect B2-2 with the big hit expectation level “medium” Is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 90 to 99, the touch operation effect B1-3 having the high jackpot expectation degree “high” is determined.

  In addition, when the lottery result is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, when the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types, if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19, the jackpot expectation When the touch operation effect B2-1 having the degree of “low” is determined and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 59, the touch operation effect B2-2 having the medium hit expectation is “medium”. If the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 84, the touch operation effect B2-3 having a high jackpot expectation level is determined, and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is If it is 85 to 94, the touch operation effect B2-4 having the jackpot expectation degree of “very high” is determined, and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter If 95 to 99 touch operation director B2-5 is a "big hit confirmation" is determined.

  That is, in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation effect having a jackpot expectation level of “high” or more is easily selected, and particularly when the lottery result is a probable change jackpot, the jackpot expectation level is “high” or more. Touch operation effects are easily selected. In other words, when a touch operation is performed during the fourth touch operation reception period R4 of the special reach effect, a touch operation effect whose jackpot expectation degree is “high” or more is easy to be executed, and in particular, the lottery result is a promising big hit. In this case, it is easy to execute a touch operation effect whose jackpot expectation is “high” or higher. Therefore, in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 of the special reach effect, the lottery result is most easily predicted by the touch operation among all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4.

<Step S2301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a non-reach effect pattern. Here, if the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, if the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 does not execute the touch operation effect. Of course, the touch operation effect may be executed when the effect pattern is a non-reach effect pattern. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines a touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for causing the touch operation effect A to be executed. That is, when the production pattern is not the non-reach production pattern, the MPU 51 can determine that the production pattern is any one of the normal reach production pattern, the super reach production pattern, and the special reach production pattern, and that the first touch operation reception period R1 exists. Therefore, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is determined.

  Specifically, the MPU 51, based on the touch operation effect selection table A1 (see FIG. 33A), the touch operation effect according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter. Decide. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that it is a touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1. When it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1, “no touch operation effect” is displayed as the touch operation effect type in the display variation pattern command. May be set, or information regarding the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 may not be included.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a normal reach effect pattern. Here, if the effect pattern is a normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determining process. That is, when the effect pattern is the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the first touch operation reception period R1 without determining the touch operation effects for the second to fourth touch operation reception periods R2 to R4. Only the touch operation effect for is determined. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2304.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the effect pattern is neither the non-reach effect pattern nor the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 performs the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. It determines (step S2304), and further determines the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (step S2305). That is, in the MPU 51, when the production pattern is neither the non-reach production pattern nor the normal reach production pattern, the production pattern is either the super reach production pattern or the special reach production pattern, and the second touch operation reception period R2 and the third touch Since it can be determined that the operation reception period R3 exists, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 are determined.

  Specifically, based on the touch operation effect selection table A2 (see FIG. 33B), the MPU 51 determines the second in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter. A touch operation effect for the touch operation reception period R2 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that it is a touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2. When it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2, “no touch operation effect” is set as the touch operation effect type in the display variation pattern command. May be set, or information regarding the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 may not be included.

  Further, the MPU 51 accepts the third touch operation based on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter based on the touch operation effect selection table B1 (see FIG. 34A). The touch operation effect for the period R3 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that it is a touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a super reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is a super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 determines the first to third touch operation reception periods R1 to R1 without determining the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation reception period R4. The touch operation reception effect for R3 is determined. On the other hand, if the effect pattern is not a super reach effect pattern (step S2306: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
When the effect pattern is not any of the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, and the super reach effect pattern (step S2307: No), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch operation reception period R4 for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 27). ) Is determined (step S2307). That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the effect pattern is a special reach effect pattern when the effect pattern is not a non-reach effect pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, or a super reach effect pattern, and that the fourth touch operation reception period R4 exists. The touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is determined.

  Specifically, based on the touch operation effect selection table B2 (see FIG. 34 (B)), the MPU 51 determines the fourth in accordance with the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter. The touch operation effect for the touch operation reception period R4 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect type is a touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

  Note that the touch operation effect type for the first to fourth touch operation reception period R4 may be set in the RAM 512 as a command different from the display variation pattern command.

[Variable game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the variable game effect process (step S <b> 1707), in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the movable accessory member 39 determined when the variable pattern command is received in the command determination process. The touch display effect (step S2205 in FIG. 23) determined when the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timing (step S2204 in FIG. 23) and the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. , The speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game effect process executed in step S1707 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 35, the MPU 51 checks the counter value of the variation counter (step S2401), and determines whether or not the counter value of the variation counter is 0 (step S2402). Here, when the counter value of the variation counter is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol is not varying. Therefore, the MPU 51 ends the variation game control process, and the counter value of the variation counter is not 0. (Step S2402: No), the process proceeds to step S2403.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 executes a movable accessory member actuating process. In the movable accessory member actuating process, the movable accessory is selected when the actuating timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 are determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Member 39 is actuated. The details of the movable accessory member actuating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2404>
In step S2404, the MPU 51 executes a touch operation effect execution process. In the touch operation effect execution process, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27). In addition, the touch operation effect is executed except when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. The details of the touch operation effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Moveable member operation]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuating process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. In the movable accessory member operation process, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (first position) to the operating position at the operation timing determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). Move to (second position) and move from the operating position to the standby position.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing in FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the start time of (27 to FIG. 30) has been reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2502, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (Step S2502). Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to ON (step S2503), and ends the movable accessory member operation processing.

<Step S2504>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504). That is, the MPU 51 ends the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to is reached. Here, if it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2505, and if it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S2506.

<Step S2505>
When it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504). S2505), the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position.

<Steps S2506 and S2507>
If it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detector 39b ( Step S2506). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to OFF (step S2507), and performs the movable accessory member operation processing. finish. In addition, when the movable accessory member 39 has not returned to the standby position (step S2506: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 37, whether or not a touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the first to third touch operation pattern flags (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) Whether or not an object exists in the specific area). Specifically, the MPU 51 touches when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When it is determined that the operation state corresponds to the touch operation start, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”, the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation continuation. Judgment is made (see FIG. 22B). Note that the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in step S2601 does not depend on whether or not the player actually performs a touch operation, but in all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. This means that the presence of an object is detected. Therefore, even when the movable accessory member 39 is actuated, it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and the detection of the object by the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation. There is.

  Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2602, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not determined that it has been detected (step S2601: No), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag that is set to ON in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operation processing of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 is one of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27) when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No). On the condition, a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) is given to the display control device 6. (Step S2603 to step S2610, which will be described later), and a touch operation effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in this embodiment, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, even if the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R1 are detected. Even if it is R4, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored by ending the touch operation effect execution process.

  Here, the movable accessory member operating flag is turned on when the operation start signal for operating the movable accessory member 39 is output to the motor driver 39c when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is reached. Since it is set (steps S2501 to S2503 in FIG. 36), the movable accessory member 39 is not activated and is in the standby position when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, since the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF when the return detection unit 39b detects the return to the standby position (steps S2506 and S2507 in FIG. 36), the movable accessory member operating flag is set. The movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position at the stage where it is set to OFF. In other words, from the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started), the movable accessory member 39 Until the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, and the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored. Therefore, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, even if the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, Regardless of whether the player is a touch operation by the player or based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, even if the first to fourth touches are performed. Even if it is operation reception period R1-R4, a touch operation effect is not performed.

<Steps S2603 and S2604>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter.

  When the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: Yes), the first touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: No), the process proceeds to step S2605.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 is determined. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: Yes), the second touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2606), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: No), the process proceeds to step S2607.

<Steps S2607 and S2608>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S2607: Yes), the third touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2608), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S2607: No), the process proceeds to step S2609.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
In step S2609, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter.

  When the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2609: Yes), the fourth touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2610), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2609: No), the MPU 51 can determine that it does not correspond to any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Then, the touch operation effect execution process ends.

[Big hit game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the jackpot game effect process (step S1708), in the jackpot game, for example, a jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect and ending) determined when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process. Effect) is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, similar to the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable game effect, a movable accessory member operation effect that activates a movable accessory member, or a symbol display unit within a touch operation reception period. Some players perform a touch operation effect by performing a touch operation on the front side of the player. In this type of gaming machine, a touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed on the assumption that the touch operation has been performed due to the movement of the movable accessory member within the touch operation reception period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, and a touch operation effect may be executed.

  In the touch operation reception period, the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period may or may not be executed, and the touch operation reception period when the touch operation reception effect is not executed is touched. In general, the touch operation effect when the operation is performed does not have a large expectation degree of jackpot. On the other hand, the movable accessory member operation effect is often executed as a chance-up effect or a jackpot finalizing effect. Therefore, the expectation for jackpot is increased by the operation of the movable accessory member, or the touch operation effect with a low expectation degree for the jackpot is executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member in a state where it is clearly shown that the jackpot Being done can also cause a decline in interest.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (movable accessory member From the stage in which the movable accessory member is in the standby position immediately before the operation of 39 is started) to the stage in which the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. Since the detection results of the detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. Therefore, even when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON and the movable accessory member 39 starts operating, it is possible to restrict the execution of the touch operation effect. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. It can also be restricted that the touch operation effect is executed before returning to. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, since the expectation for the jackpot is increased by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or a touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation is not executed in a state where it is clearly shown that the jackpot is won, Decline can be prevented.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of an object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the movable accessory member 39 is turned on while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. From the stage where it is determined to be actuated (the stage where the movable accessory member 39 immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position), the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory is confirmed. Until the stage where the member 39 is at the standby position, the case where the detection results of the objects by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member is started). From the first embodiment, the process for determining whether or not the presence of an object has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors is not executed until the return of the movable accessory member is confirmed. .

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment described above, whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Is determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 on the condition that the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No). Based on a combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B), it is determined whether or not a touch operation is detected (step S2702). Then, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 is in any one of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 as in the first embodiment described above. In some cases (Yes in any of steps S2603, S2605, S2607, and S2609), a touch operation effect execution command in the corresponding touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604, S2606, S2608 or S2610).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the movable accessory member 39 is to be operated (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started). Until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed (step S2701: Yes), regardless of whether the player has performed a touch operation or the movable accessory member 39 has been activated. The process (step S2702) for determining whether or not an object exists on the front side of the predetermined area of the symbol display unit 341 is not executed. Thus, the touch operation effect is not executed while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. For this reason, as in the first embodiment described above, the action of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, and the touch operation effect is executed. Can be prevented. As a result, the expectation for the jackpot is increased by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or a touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation is not executed in a state where it is clearly shown that the jackpot is won. Can be prevented.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started). The case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a one-notification production effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit is executed in accordance with the operation of the movable accessory member, This is different from the first embodiment described above in that the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted according to the situation determined to have occurred. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the execution timing of the one notification effect is during the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. Further, in the present embodiment, when execution of the touch operation effect is restricted, an effect (specific effect) different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect. Is different. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result, or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment. 40A is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect determination table referred to in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40B is set in the specific effect determination table of FIG. It is a figure which shows the expectation degree (bonus expectation degree) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery with respect to a specific effect is a big hit.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801). This effect execution command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a touch operation effect or a specific effect, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811, which will be described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined, for example, when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811, which will be described later, so that the transmitted flag is set to ON. It can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. Note that it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect and the specific effect from being repeatedly started by determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S2801. However, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected after the touch operation effect or the specific effect is finished (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation reception period is set. The touch operation effect or the specific effect may be executed again on the condition that there is.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has already transmitted the effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process and has not transmitted the effect execution command to the display control device 6. (Step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2802.

<Step S2802>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 combines the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 (FIG. 22). Based on (B), it is determined whether or not a touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2803 and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not determined that it has been detected (step S2802: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is determined based on, for example, the value of the variation counter and the variation type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. Note that, in the following, when it is determined whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 to the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the value of the variation counter and the step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. This is determined based on the determined variation type (effect pattern).

  Here, if the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2811, and if it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: No), the process is performed in steps. The process moves to S2804.

<Step S2804>
When it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S2804). Here, if the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S2804: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2805, and if it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S2804: No), the process is stepped. The process moves to S2806.

<Step S2805>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step S2805). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second touch operation reception period R2 is a reception period when the normal reach effect is being executed or a reception period when the super reach effect is being executed. Whether or not the super reach effect is being executed is determined based on, for example, the value of the change counter and the change type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, when the MPU 51 is executing the super reach effect (step S2805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2807, and when the super reach effect is not being executed (step S2805: No), the process proceeds to step S2811. Transition.

<Step S2806>
When it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806). Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2807, and the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch is performed. If it is not the operation reception period R4 (step S2807: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S2807>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 during execution of the super reach effect (step S2807: Yes), or when it is either the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag that is set to ON in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operation processing of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S2807: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2808, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S2807: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2808>
When the movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 notifies that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big hit by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether or not an effect is executed (step S2808). Here, when one notification notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2808: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2809, and one notification notification effect is generated by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. Is not executed (step S2809: NO), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2809>
When the one notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a specific effect determination process (step S2810). That is, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d during execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect determination process (in the command determination process of FIG. 23). In order to execute the specific effect instead of executing the touch operation effect determined in step S2205), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is determined in the specific effect determination process in step S2809. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (expected degree of jackpot), or may be an effect unrelated to the result of the jackpot lottery, but in this embodiment, the effect indicating the expectation of jackpot Run as.

  Here, FIG. 40A is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process executed in step S2809 in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect set by the specific effect determination table of 40 (A).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), in the specific effect determination table, the specification corresponding to the counter value of the specific effect pattern type counter is determined according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability big hit, 16R probability big hit, and off). “Specific effects A1” to “Specific effects A3”, “Final effects A”, “Final effects B”, and “Premier effects” are defined as the effect pattern types. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), the “specific effect A1” is an effect having a “big” expectation degree of “hit”, and the “specific effect A2” is an effect having an expectation degree of “hit”. The production “A3” is a production with a big hit expectation of “very high”.

  “Confirmed effect A” is an image effect of “big hit confirmed” executed in the symbol display unit 341. The image effect as the confirmed effect A is an effect that is executed at a position where it is not visible or difficult to visually recognize, for example, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. In this case, the confirmed effect A can be visually recognized when the movable accessory member returns to the standby position. Therefore, by including the confirmed effect A as the specific effect, not only whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is activated, but the player can receive the confirmed effect on the symbol display unit 341 after the movable accessory member 39 is returned. It can be noted whether it is executed or not. Thereby, even after the end of the movable accessory member effect, the player can be kept interested in the effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  “Confirmed effect B” is an effect other than the image effect of “successful jackpot”, for example, a sound output effect in which a notification sound or notification voice of jackpot determination is output from the speaker 26, or a mode of jackpot determination (for example, lighting with rainbow) A lamp effect for lighting the electric decoration part 27 and a movable accessory member operating effect for operating the movable accessory member 39 are conceivable. If it is determined in step S2802 that the touch operation has been detected by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the movable accessory member 39 is immediately operated again after the movable accessory member 39 is returned to the standby position. It is possible. In this case, since the confirmed effect B is executed as the second movable accessory member operation effect of the movable accessory member operation effect that is continuously executed, the confirmed effect B is executed as an unexpected effect. In addition, the player can pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is actuated again after the movable accessory member 39 is returned. Thereby, even after the end of the movable accessory member effect, the player can be kept interested in the effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  “Premier production” is a production of “Confirmed probable big hit”. Further, the “premier effect” is an effect whose selection rate is extremely low compared to other effects. In this embodiment, the “premier effect” is selected only when the lottery result is a promising big hit, and the selection rate is 1%. For example, as the “premier effect”, an image effect in which an image of a rare character having an extremely low appearance rate compared to other characters is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be considered.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40A, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, any one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the finalized effect A, and the finalized effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. However, the premier production is never selected. Further, when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the confirmed effect A and the confirmed effect B can be selected, but the selection rate is low.

  When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the confirmed effect A, and the confirmed effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, but the premier effect is selected. There is no. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the confirmed effect A and the confirmed effect are easier to select than the 5R normal jackpot.

  When the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the confirmed effect A, the confirmed effect B, and the premier effect is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. In addition, when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the effect that determines the jackpot including the premier performance is easier to select than the 5R regular jackpot, but the selection rate is the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the premiere effect is low. Is selected.

  When the lottery result is out of the range, any one of the specific effects A1 to A3 is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and the confirmed effect A, the confirmed effect B, and the premier effect are not selected. In addition, when the lottery result is out of the range, the specific effect A with the jackpot expectation degree “medium” is easily selected, and the specific effect B with the jackpot expectation degree “high” and the specific effect C with the “big hit” expectation degree The selectivity is low.

<Step S2810>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, in step S2810, the MPU 51 sets a specific effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the specific effect determined in step S2809, and transmits it to the display control device 6. Thereby, the specific effect is executed in the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S2811>
In step S2811, when the MPU 51 determines that a touch operation has been detected (when an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25)), touch operation effect determination processing (FIG. 23, a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in step S2205) in the command determination process of 23 is transmitted to the display control device 6. Thereby, the display control device 6 is based on the determination that the touch operation has been detected (based on the detection of the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S2802 :: Yes). ), Causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect.

  Specifically, the display control device 6 causes the MPU 51 to place an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2 during execution of the normal reach effect. When it is determined whether or not it exists, a touch operation effect determined in advance is executed. That is, in the normal reach effect, the touch operation effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed. In the first touch operation reception period R1, a touch operation effect determined in advance is always executed.

  On the other hand, the display control device 6 performs the second touch operation reception period R2 and the third touch operation during which the super reach effect is being executed by the MPU 51 on the condition that the one notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. When it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the start of the touch operation in the reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect determined in advance. That is, in the super reach effect and the special reach effect, when the one notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the specific effect is executed, and the touch operation effect is not executed. In other words, when a single notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the touch operation in a period for accepting the touch operation that allows the touch operation to be executed. Execution of production is restricted. In the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed, the specific effect is always executed instead of the touch operation effect.

  As described above, in the conventional gaming machine in which the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, A touch operation effect may be executed. Here, the movable accessory member operation effect may be executed as a one-shot notification effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit. In particular, the super reach production and the special reach production are often executed as a jackpot finalizing production as compared to the normal reach production. On the other hand, the touch operation effect often includes an effect in which the lottery result can hardly be expected to be a big hit. Therefore, when it is erroneously detected that a player touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion due to the operation of the movable accessory member, one notification is made by the operation of the movable accessory member. When an effect that is hardly expected to be a big hit is performed immediately after the effect is being performed, there is a concern that the player will be less interested in the game at once.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is almost impossible to expect a big hit when a one-shot notification effect by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed in the super reach effect or the special reach effect. A specific effect is executed instead of a touch operation effect that may be executed as an effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 40 (A) and FIG. 40 (B), the specific effect is a medium jackpot expectation degree even in the specific effect A1 having the lowest expectation value of jackpot, and it is almost a big hit. Production that cannot be expected is not included. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an effect that is hardly expected to be a big hit immediately after a single announcement effect is performed in a super reach effect or a special reach effect.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is confirmed. In the second embodiment described above, while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the touch operation effect is not executed by not confirming the presence or absence of the touch operation. That is, in both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the touch operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 while the movable accessory member 39 is operating. . However, in the early stage of the production pattern, for example, in the normal reach production, it is difficult to execute the production with a high expectation degree of jackpot. Therefore, it is not necessary to limit the execution of the touch operation production in the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production. In particular, the touch operation effect by the touch operation in the first touch operation reception period R1 is less necessary to limit the execution.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited in the high-speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect. Further, in the first touch operation reception period R1, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, depending on the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39, execution of the touch operation effect may be restricted or may not be restricted. As a result, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted at a timing at which a decrease in interest in the game is likely to occur through the entire effect from the start of the variable symbol display to the stop of the variable symbol display, while at other timings. Since the touch operation effect is executed as scheduled, the touch operation effect can be prevented from becoming meaningless.

  In this embodiment, in the special reach production pattern, the execution of the touch operation production is restricted in both the super reach production and the special reach production, but in the special reach production pattern, the touch operation production is performed only in the special reach production. Execution may be limited.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is a touch operation, a touch operation effect or a specific effect is immediately executed, but when it is determined that the touch operation has ended after it is determined that there is a touch operation, A touch operation effect or a specific effect may be executed. For example. When it is determined that the touch operation has been performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the touch operation effect or the specific effect may be executed after the movable accessory member 39 returns.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the gaming machine 10 includes one movable accessory member 39 and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the detection results of the four detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case where is ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine includes two movable accessory members, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted while one movable accessory member is operating, and the touch operation is performed while the other movable accessory member is operating. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that the execution of the performance is not limited. The present embodiment is also different from the first embodiment in that it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed by two detection sensors.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 41 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a main movable accessory member 39A, a sub movable accessory member 39B, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, A sub detection sensor 38C and a second sub detection sensor 38D are provided.

  The main movable accessory member 39A is the same member as the movable accessory member 39 of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, and is a predetermined first standby position located above the symbol display unit 341. (See FIG. 4) and the second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position, along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 by the driving force from the first motor 39a1. It can move up and down. The first motor 39a1 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member 39A can be operated at the operation timings G2, G4, and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG. The coverage on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the main movable accessory member 39A is in the first operation position is the coverage of the symbol display unit 341 when the sub movable accessory member 39B is in the second operation position. It is higher than the coverage on the front side. Further, the operation frequency of the main movable accessory member 39A is higher than the operation frequency of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

  In the left region of the symbol display unit 341, the sub movable accessory member 39B is disposed between the second standby position and the second operating position from the center of the symbol display unit 341 on the right side of the second standby position. It can be moved in the left-right direction along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 by the driving force from 39a2. The second motor 39a2 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the sub movable accessory member 39B can be operated at the operation timings G1, G3, and G5 among the operation timings G1 to G6 illustrated in FIG.

  The sub movable accessory member 39B includes a display unit 391B configured by a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. That is, the sub movable accessory member 39 also has a function as a sub display. In the display unit 391B, for example, an effect linked to the variable game effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Further, in the display unit 391B, a touch operation reception effect and a touch operation effect are executed. The display content on the display unit 391B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51 and the like.

  Of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 27, the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3 are touch operations on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. This is a period in which the display unit 391B receives a touch operation for performing an effect, and the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 perform a touch operation for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect. This is the period that is received by the symbol display unit 341. Further, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is executed.

  The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and are optical sensors such as a diffuse reflection type sensor. The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light received. The first main detection sensor 38A is disposed on the upper right side of the symbol display unit 341, and the second main detection sensor 38B is disposed on the left side of the central portion of the symbol display unit 341. The range in which presence can be detected is different.

  Here, FIG. 43 is a front view schematically showing detection ranges of the main detection sensors 38A and 38D for the symbol display unit 341 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 43A shows the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (the portion where cross-hatching is given in the figure), and FIG. 43B shows the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B ( FIG. 43C shows an overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (cross-hatching in the drawing). Part).

  As shown in FIG. 43 (A), the first main detection sensor 38A detects the presence of an object in a region excluding the lower part and the upper right part of the symbol display unit 341 based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. .

  As shown in FIG. 43 (B), the second main detection sensor 38B detects the left part of the symbol display part 341 (the operation area of the sub movable accessory member 39B) and the right based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detects the presence of an object in a region other than the lower part.

  As shown in FIG. 43C, the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) is This is an area excluding the left part of the symbol display part 341 (operation area of the sub movable accessory member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part, and the lower right part. In this overlapping area, the left part of the symbol display unit 341 (the operation area of the sub movable accessory member 39B) and the lower part are not within the detection range, and for example, it is erroneously assumed that the player has performed a touch operation with a game ball that has passed the warp. It can be prevented from being detected. Further, in the overlapping region, the left portion of the symbol display unit 341 (the operation region of the sub movable accessory member 39B) is not within the detection range, and for example, a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is performed. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection that the touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has been performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B). By detecting the presence, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. That is, the MPU 51 touches a predetermined area (a specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. It is determined that the operation has been performed.

  Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, it may be determined that the object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the first main detection sensor 38 </ b> A and the second main detection sensor 38 </ b> B are not limited to the periphery of the symbol display unit 341, and may be disposed at the peripheral portion of the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, the number of main detection sensors is not limited to two, but may be other numbers.

  The first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and are optical such as a diffuse reflection type sensor. Type sensor. The first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light received. The first sub detection sensor 38C is arranged at the upper center of the display unit 391B, and the second sub detection sensor 38D is arranged at the lower center of the display unit 391B, and the ranges in which the presence of an object can be detected are different.

  Here, FIG. 44 is a front view schematically showing detection ranges of the first and second sub detection sensors 38C and 38D with respect to the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, FIG. 44A shows the detection range of the first sub-detection sensor 38C (the cross-hatched portion in the figure), and FIG. 44B shows the detection range of the second sub-detection sensor 38D ( 44 (C) shows the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D (cross hatching is shown in the drawing). Part).

  As shown in FIG. 44A, the first sub detection sensor 38C excludes the upper left corner and upper right corner of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of objects in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 44B, the second sub detection sensor 38D removes the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of objects in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 44C, the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C (see FIG. 44A) and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D (see FIG. 44B) is This is an area excluding the four corners of the display unit 391B. That is, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D are set to have different detection ranges.

  By the way, each of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D may detect an object other than the front side of the display unit 391B (left side or right side of the display unit 391B). For example, a game ball that passes through the warp and passes the left side of the display unit 391B, a main movable accessory member 39A that moves on the right side of the display unit 391B, and a player's operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 are detected There is a possibility that. On the other hand, whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D. If it is set as a detection range for determining whether or not a touch operation has been performed by an object present around the display unit 391B, it can be prevented from being erroneously detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is performed in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D. It is set as a detection range for judging whether or not. That is, the MPU 51 determines that a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 341 has been performed when the presence of an object is detected by both the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D. Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D, it may be determined that the object is present on the front side of the display unit 391B. Further, the number of sub detection sensors may be one or more, and the number of sub detection sensors is not limited to two and may be other numbers.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the two movable accessory members 39A and 39B and the two display units 341 and 391B, and the detection sensor 38A that detects a touch operation on the display units 341 and 391B. With ~ 38D. That is, in this embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D having different detection ranges are provided. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect based on the touch operation on the front side of the sub movable accessory member 39B different from the symbol display unit 341 is prevented while the erroneous detection due to the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is prevented. It can be executed by the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39A. Thereby, even when the main movable accessory member 39A is operating, it is possible to receive a touch operation and execute a touch operation effect. In this embodiment, processes such as a touch operation detection process, a movable accessory member activation process, and a touch operation effect execution process are mainly different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the above-described processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Touch operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, a predetermined region (panel 25 on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) is determined based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by the same procedure as in the first embodiment. The touch operation state with respect to the specific area in FIG. 3 is detected, and processing for sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is executed (steps S2901 to S2908). Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the symbol display unit is set at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of a touch operation by the player on a predetermined area on the front side of 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) is determined.

  In the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, based on the detection results of the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D, the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is detected. A process for detecting the touch operation state and sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories for the front side of the display unit 391B is executed (steps S2909 to S2916). Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, whereby the display unit 391B is displayed at a predetermined interval corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process (1 msec interval in the present embodiment). The presence or absence of a touch operation by the player on the front side of the player is determined.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
As shown in FIG. 45, in steps S2901 and S2902, the MPU 51 executes a process of shifting the previous and previous touch operation histories among the touch operation histories for a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. To do. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second main touch operation detection flag to the first main touch operation detection flag (step S2901), and sets the third main touch operation detection flag to the second main touch. The operation detection flag is shifted (overwritten) (step S2902).

<Steps S2903 and S2904>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether the presence of the touch operation object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A, and when the presence of the object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: Yes). ), The first main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2904), and the process proceeds to step S2905. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2905 without setting the first main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2905 and S2906>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B, and when the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: Yes). The second main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2906), and the process proceeds to step S2907. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2907 without setting the second main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state as the third main touch operation detection flag based on the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third main touch operation detection flag to ON when both the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag are set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines that an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. Set the main touch operation detection flag to ON. On the other hand, when at least one of the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 has an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The third main touch operation detection flag is set to OFF. In addition, when the setting of the third main touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and causes the process to proceed to step S2909.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In steps S2909 and S2910, the MPU 51 executes a process of shifting the previous and previous touch operation histories out of the touch operation histories for the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second sub-touch operation detection flag to the first sub-touch operation detection flag (step S2909), and sets the third sub-touch operation detection flag to the second sub-touch operation detection flag. Shift (overwrite) is performed (step S2910).

<Steps S2911 and S2912>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the first sub detection sensor 38C, and when the presence of the object is detected by the first sub detection sensor 38C (step S2911: Yes). The first sub detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2912), and the process proceeds to step S2913. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the first sub detection sensor 38C (step S2911: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2913 without setting the first sub detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2913 and S2914>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D, and when the presence of the object is detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D (step S2911: Yes). The second sub detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2914), and the process proceeds to step S2915. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D (step S2913: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2915 without setting the second sub detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2915 and S2916>
In step S2915, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state to the third sub touch operation detection flag based on the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third sub-touch operation detection flag to ON when both the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag are set to ON. That is, in the MPU 51, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D, the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Accordingly, the third sub-touch operation detection flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when at least one of the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 does not have an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the display unit 391B. And the third sub-touch operation detection flag is set to OFF. Further, when the setting of the third sub-touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection process.

  As described above, in the touch operation detection process, the process of steps S2901 to S2908 is executed, so that the latest three touch operation states at 1 msec intervals as the main touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 are performed. Are stored in the RAM 512 as the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as the third main touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is stored as the second main touch operation detection flag, and two as the first main touch operation detection flag. The previous operation state is stored. Then, based on the main touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 composed of the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag, the touch on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is performed. An operation detection pattern is determined.

  Here, FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation situation.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, when the main touch operation history is “on”, “on”, or “on”, the MPU 51 continues the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The first main touch operation pattern flag is set to “ON”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”.

  Further, when the main touch operation history is “off”, “on”, or “on”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has started, and the first main touch The operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”.

  In addition, when the main touch operation history is “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the first main touch The operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”.

  Further, when the main touch operation history is not any of the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation, and the end of the touch operation, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is not performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Then, the first main touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”.

  In the touch operation detection process, the processes of steps S2909 to S2916 are further executed, so that the latest three touch operation states at 1 msec intervals as the sub touch operation history for the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B are displayed. The first sub-touch operation detection flag to the third sub-touch operation detection flag are stored in the RAM 512. Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as the third sub touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is stored as the second sub touch operation detection flag, and the previous operation is stored as the first sub touch operation detection flag. The state is stored. And based on the main touch operation log | history with respect to the front side of the display part 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B which consists of a 1st sub touch operation detection flag-3rd sub touch operation detection flag, the touch operation detection pattern with respect to the front side of the display part 391B Is determined.

  Here, FIG. 46B is a diagram illustrating an example of a sub-touch operation data table indicating the relationship between the sub-touch operation detection pattern and the sub-touch operation status.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, when the sub-touch operation history is “on”, “on”, or “on”, the MPU 51 performs a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B. The first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “ON”, the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”.

  In addition, when the sub-touch operation history is “off”, “on”, or “on”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B has started, and the first The sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”, and the third sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”.

  Further, when the sub-touch operation history is “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B is completed, and the first The sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, and the third sub touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”.

  Further, when the sub touch operation history is not any of the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation, and the end of the touch operation, the MPU 51 does not perform the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. The first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”.

[Moveable member operation]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member actuating process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the movable accessory member actuating process of the present embodiment, a process of actuating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of actuating the movable accessory member 39 of the first embodiment described above ( Steps S3001 to S3007). In the movable accessory member actuating process of the present embodiment, further, unlike the first embodiment, a process of actuating the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed (steps S3008 to S3011).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 47, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timing G2, G4, G6 of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the starting point of the time has been reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3002, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No). ), The process proceeds to step S3004.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the operation to the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. A signal is output (step S3002). Accordingly, the motor driver 39c controls the first motor 39a1 to move the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to ON (step S3003), and ends the movable accessory component operating process.

<Step S3004>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timing G2, G4, G6 of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3005 and does not return the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S3006.

<Step S3006>
When it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. In step S3005, the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Accordingly, the motor driver 39c controls the first motor 39a1 to move the main movable accessory member 39A from the operating position to the standby position.

<Steps S3006 and S3007>
When it is not the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member 39A has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detector 39b. (Step S3006). Here, when the main movable accessory member 39A returns to the standby position (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member operating flag to OFF (step S3007), and operates the movable accessory member. The process ends. If the main movable accessory member 39A has not returned to the standby position (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timing G1, G3, G5 of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the starting point of the time has been reached. Here, if it is the operation start timing of the sub movable combination member 39B (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3009, and if it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable combination member 39B (step S3008: No), the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
When it is the operation start timing of the sub movable combination member 39B (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 starts operation of the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub movable combination member 39B. A signal is output (step S3009), and the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Accordingly, the motor driver 39c controls the second motor 39a2 to move the sub movable accessory member 39B from the standby position to the operating position.

<Step S3010>
When it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable combination member 39B (step S3008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the sub movable combination member 39B (step S3010). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timing G1, G3, G5 of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3011 and does not return the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: No). Then, the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated.

<Step S3011>
When it is the return timing of the sub movable combination member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub movable combination member 39B. In step S3011, the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Accordingly, the motor driver 39c controls the second motor 39a2 to move the sub movable accessory member 39B from the operating position to the standby position.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of this embodiment, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in a predetermined touch operation reception period in the same procedure as in the first embodiment described above. Processing for executing the touch operation effect or processing for restricting execution of the touch operation effect is performed (steps S3101 to S3106). However, in the present embodiment, in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the symbol display unit 341 Although the touch operation effect is executed or restricted, the touch operation effect is not executed or restricted on the symbol display unit 341 in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3.

  Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. A touch operation effect is executed when a touch operation on the front side is performed (steps S3107 to S3111). In the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited even when the main movable accessory member 39A or the sub movable accessory member 39B is in operation.

<Step S3100>
As shown in FIG. 48, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3100). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and is sent to the display control device 6 in steps S3104, S3106, S3109, or S3111 described later. Sent. Whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined, for example, when the touched effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3104, S3106, S3109 or S3111 described later. This can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. Note that it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started by determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S3100. However, when it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state is started after the touch operation effect is ended (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation The touch operation effect may be executed again on the condition that it is a reception period.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has transmitted the effect execution command (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3100: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to S3101.

<Step S3101>
When the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. (Whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)) is determined (step S3101). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the touch operation (main touch operation state) (main touch operation state) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of the main touch operation or the continuation of the main touch operation. . Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When it is determined that the state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”, the main touch operation state continues to be the main touch operation (See FIG. 46A). The detection of the main touch operation by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B in step S3101 does not mean whether or not the main touch operation is actually performed by the player, but the presence of an object in both the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. It means that it is detected. Therefore, it is determined that the main touch operation has been performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 also by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, and the detection of the object by the main movable accessory member 39A is the main touch operation. May be mistakenly detected.

  Here, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3102, and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B perform the main touch operation. If it is not determined that it has been detected (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3107.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag that is set to ON in step S3003 in the movable accessory member activation processing of FIG. 47 is set to ON. Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Under certain conditions, a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. Transmit (step S3103 to step S3106 described later).

  On the other hand, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in this embodiment, the main touch operation state is changed to the main touch operation state by detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. In the case where it is determined to correspond to the start, even if it is the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. By ending the touch operation effect execution process, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored.

  Here, the flag indicating that the main movable accessory member operating flag is reached is the stage when the operation start signal for operating the main movable accessory member 39A is output to the motor driver 39c when the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A is reached. In step S3001 to S3003 in FIG. 47, the main movable accessory member 39A is not activated and is in the standby position when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the main movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to OFF when the return detection unit 39b detects the return to the standby position (steps S3006 and S3007 in FIG. 47). When the middle flag is set to OFF, the main movable accessory member 39A is not operated and is in the standby position. That is, from the stage at which it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the stage at which the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started), The main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON until the return of the physical member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position, and the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection are detected. The detection result of the sensor 38B is ignored. Therefore, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the presence of an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. Even if it is detected, the detection result of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B regardless of whether it is a touch operation by the player or based on the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A Is ignored, the touch operation effect is not executed even in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
In step S3103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 is determined. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3103: Yes), the second touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3105.

<Steps S3105 and S3106>
In step S3105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter.

  When the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: Yes), the fourth touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3106), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3107>
When it is not determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: No), the MPU 51 performs the sub touch operation by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B) (step S3107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the touch operation (sub-touch operation state) (sub-touch operation state) for the predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continuation of the sub-touch operation. to decide. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs sub-touch when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When it is determined that the operation state corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation, and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub-touch operation. Judgment is made (see FIG. 46B).

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108, and the sub touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is determined (step S3107: No), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
When it is determined that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3108). ). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to perform the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. The first touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed on the display unit 391B. In the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect is not executed, and the touch operation effect A is executed when the touch operation is started (see FIG. 49A). On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3108: No), the process proceeds to step S3110.

<Steps S3110 and S3111>
In step S3110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter.

  When the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to perform the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. The third touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3111), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed on the display unit 391B. In the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation reception effect is executed, and the touch operation effect B is executed when the touch operation is started (see FIG. 49B). On the other hand, when it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process.

  As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range (see FIG. 43C) of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable accessory When the member 39A is operated, the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when an overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the presence of an object, the main touch operation state is changed by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Since it is determined that it corresponds to the start of the main touch operation, when the main movable accessory member 39A is actuated in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect is caused due to erroneous detection. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, when the main movable accessory member 39A is determined to be activated (main From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39A is started), the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed, and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position. Until a certain stage, detection of an object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and execution of the touch operation effect is restricted. Therefore, even if the main movable accessory member 39A starts operating after the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, it is possible to restrict the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course the main movable accessory member 39A. It can also be restricted that the touch operation effect is executed before the camera returns to the standby position. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the main movable accessory member is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display unit 341 but also on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Therefore, diversification of touch operation effects can be achieved, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the touch operation effect executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed regardless of whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Thereby, by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the touch operation executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B that is executed at a position where the main movable accessory member 39A is visible even when the main movable accessory member 39A is in the operating position. It is possible to prevent the execution from being restricted unnecessarily until the production.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B by the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B has been described. For example, as illustrated in FIG. A touch operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 on the condition that the main movable accessory member 39A is not operated by a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B in the first or third touch operation reception period R1, R3. You may make it do. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 51, the main movable accessory member 39A is not activated by the touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. On the condition, the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B. 50 and 51 illustrate the case where the touch operation reception effect is executed during the touch operation reception period, but the touch operation reception effect is not executed during the touch operation reception period. The touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit that is different from the display unit on which is performed. Furthermore, the touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed on condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit, and the lottery result is a promising big hit. The touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation has been performed.

  In this way, when the touch operation effect is executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation has been performed, the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit that is not anticipated by the player, It is possible to focus attention not only on whether or not the expectation level touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the touch operation effect is executed. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved. In particular, if the touch operation effect is executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed on condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit, the interest of the game is effectively improved. By making the lottery result a promising big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the game more effectively.

  In addition, a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 and a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B are simultaneously received, and the symbol display unit 341 when any touch operation is performed. It is also conceivable to execute a touch operation effect on at least one of the display portions 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A are ignored. By limiting the execution of the touch operation effect, it corresponds to erroneous detection of the touch operation by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, but it is movable as in the second embodiment described above. While the accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not the presence of an object has been detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is not performed, thereby causing erroneous detection. May correspond.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub movable accessory member 39B includes the display unit 391B. However, the sub movable accessory member 39B may have a configuration that does not include the display unit 391B. The structure provided with a sub display may be sufficient.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when it is determined that the main movable accessory member 39A is to be activated (the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is Until the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed), the detection result of the object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and the touch operation effect is produced. The case where the execution of the application is restricted has been described.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the touch effect in the display portion of the sub movable accessory member when the main movable accessory member is operating during the touch operation reception period for causing the symbol display portion to perform the touch operation. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that a specific effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is actuated during the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, or when the main movable accessory member 39A is in operation. When the second touch operation reception period R2 is started, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed not on the symbol display unit 341 but on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

  In the second touch operation reception period R2, the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is not executed in the symbol display unit 341, while in the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation reception effect is not displayed in the symbol display unit 341. Executed. Further, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is not set to ON, a touch operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

  The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (expected expectation of jackpot), or may be an effect unrelated to the result of the jackpot lottery. It is executed as an effect to be shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the front of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3, as in the fourth embodiment described above. When a touch operation is performed on the side, a touch operation effect is executed (S3108 to S3111 in FIG. 54).

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member operating flag is turned on in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, unlike the fourth embodiment described above. Is set, a specific effect different from the touch effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (steps S3202 to S3205 and steps S3208 to S3211 in FIG. 53). The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (expected degree of jackpot), or may be an effect unrelated to the result of the jackpot lottery, but in this embodiment, the effect indicating the expectation of jackpot (See FIG. 40). The display content on the display unit 391B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51.

<Step S3200>
As shown in FIG. 53, in step S3200, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 or a touch operation effect or a specific effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Steps S3205, S3207, which will be described later, It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3211 or S3213. Whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined, for example, when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3205, S3207, S3211 or S3213 described later. This can be determined by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has transmitted the effect execution command (step S3200: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to S3201.

<Step S3201>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags (sub movable). It is determined whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the touch operation (sub-touch operation state) (sub-touch operation state) on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continued sub-touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state is when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the sub-touch operation detection pattern determination process is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When it is determined that the sub-touch operation is started and the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the continuation of the sub-touch operation ( (See FIG. 46B).

  Here, if the MPU 51 determines that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, the processing after it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D is the same as that in the fourth embodiment described above, and the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third When the sub-touch operation is performed in the touch operation reception period R3, a command for executing the touch operation is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S3108 to S3111).

  On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not determine that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3202 in FIG.

<Step S3202>
When it is not determined that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3202). . Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 is determined. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3203, and if it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3202: No), the process is stepped. The process moves to S3208.

<Step S3203>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3202: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. Is determined (step S3203). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3204, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3203: NO), the process proceeds to step S3206.

<Steps S3204 and S3205>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Is determined (step S3204). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the symbol display unit 341 with the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, and performs the specific effect determined in step S3204. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3205), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, a specific effect is performed in the display part 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 performs main touch by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not an operation has been detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25)) (step S3206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the touch operation (main touch operation state) (main touch operation state) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of the main touch operation or the continuation of the main touch operation. . Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When it is determined that the state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”, the main touch operation state continues to be the main touch operation (See FIG. 46A).

  Here, when a touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute a touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. A 2-touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3207), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3209, and when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: No), the touch operation is performed. The effect execution process ends.

<Step S3209>
When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. Is determined (step S3209). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3210, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3209: NO), the process proceeds to step S3212.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Is determined (step S3210). Then, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3210 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process in step S2205 in the command determination process in FIG. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3211), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, a specific effect is performed in the display part 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3209: NO), the MPU 51 performs main processing based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags, similarly to the previous step S3206. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation has been detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25)) (step S3212). Here, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on the symbol display unit 341. The 4th touch operation effect execution command for making it set is transmitted to the display control apparatus 6 (step S3213), and the said touch operation effect execution process is complete | finished. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 does not determine that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

  As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable accessory member 39A is operated. The presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when an overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the presence of an object, the touch operation is performed by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, if the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, there is a problem if the touch operation effect is executed due to erroneous detection. Occurs.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main movable combination in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the condition that the object member operating flag is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the main movable accessory member 39A is to be operated (the main movable accessory member 39A immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started). The symbol display section is provided on the condition that the stage from the stage in which the accessory member 39 is in the standby position) to the stage in which the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position after the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed. Instead of executing the touch operation effect at 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Therefore, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341, even if the main movable accessory member 39A is operated, the touch operation effect is executed. Can be restricted. In addition, instead of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B that is not obstructed when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the touch operation effect is limited.

  When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B on condition that it is a big hit. As described above, when a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the player is not expected. Not only what type (expectation) of touch operation effects are executed by executing a specific effect on the display unit, but also what display unit the effect is executed on. be able to. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved. In particular, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, instead of executing the touch operation effect in the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed in the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game, and it is possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game on the condition that the lottery result is a promising big hit.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 includes the movable accessory member 39 that is moved between the standby position and the operating position, and by operating the movable accessory member 39, a chance-up effect and a jackpot are determined. The case where the production is executed has been described. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when the movable accessory member 39 is determined to be operated (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is From the time immediately before starting until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. .

  On the other hand, this embodiment is common to the first embodiment described above in that it includes a movable accessory member, but differs from the first embodiment in that the movable accessory member has a display unit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member is in operation during a period of receiving a touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit, the display unit of the movable accessory member is different from the touch effect. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that the specific effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the movable accessory member operation effect executed in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the movable accessory member 39C includes a display unit 392C configured by a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. That is, the movable accessory member 39C also has a function as a sub display. In C on the display unit 392, for example, an image effect is executed when the movable accessory member 39C is in the operating position. In the present embodiment, when the execution period of the movable accessory member effect and the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 7) overlap, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect. Is done. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (expected degree of jackpot), or may be an effect unrelated to the result of the jackpot lottery, but in this embodiment, the effect indicating the expectation of jackpot (See FIG. 40). The display content on the display unit 392C is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, a predetermined area (specification of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 as in the first embodiment described above. The touch operation effect can be executed when the touch operation is performed on the region.

  Furthermore, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. In the case where there is, the specific effect different from the touch effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

<Step S3300>
As shown in FIG. 56, in step S3300, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 or executing a specific effect on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, and will be described later in steps S3305, S3306, S3210, In step S3311, S3315, step S3316, step S3305, or S3320, the data is transmitted to the display control device 6. Whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined, for example, when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3305, S3210, S3320 or S3321 described later. It can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has transmitted the effect execution command (step S3300: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S3301.

<Step S3301>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (symbol). It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) (step S3301). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the touch operation state (touch operation state) for a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of touch operation or the continuation of touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the touch operation when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When the state corresponds to the touch operation start and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, “OFF”, it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation continuation (FIG. 22 (B)). Note that the detection of the touch operation by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in step S3301 includes a case where the touch operation is performed by the player and a case where the touch operation is performed by the movable accessory member 39C. That is, the MPU 51 may erroneously detect that the touch operation state is the touch operation start or the touch operation continuation when the movable accessory member 39C is operated. If the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When the detected detection is not made (step S3301: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3302>
When it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step 27). S3302). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3303, and if it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: No), the process is performed in steps. The process moves to S3307.

<Step S3303>
When it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Judgment is made (step S3303). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3303: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3304, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3303: NO), the process proceeds to step S3306.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3303: YES), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3304). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the symbol display unit 341 with the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), and the specific effect determined in step S3304. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3305), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, in the display part 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 in the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3306>
When an object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3303: No), the MPU 51 performs a first touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a first touch operation effect. A touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3306), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, in the symbol display part 341, the touch operation effect in the 1st touch operation reception period R1 is performed.

<Step S3307>
When it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3307). Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 is determined. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3308, and if it is not the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3307: No), the process is illustrated. The process shifts to step S3312 of 57.

<Step S3308>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Judgment is made (step S3308). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3309 and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S3308: No), the process proceeds to step S3311.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3309). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the symbol display unit 341 with the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process in FIG. 23), and the specific effect determined in step S3309. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3310), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, in the display part 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the second reception period R2 in the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3311>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), the MPU 51 performs the second touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3311), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, in the symbol display part 341, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed.

<Step S3312>
As shown in FIG. 57, when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) (step S3312). . Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313. The process moves to S3317.

<Step S3313>
When it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Judgment is made (step S3313). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3314, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S3313: No), the process proceeds to step S3316.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3314). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the symbol display unit 341 with the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), and the specific effect determined in step S3314. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3315), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, in the display part 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3 in the symbol display part 341.

<Step S3316>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3313: No), the MPU 51 performs the third touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3316), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, in the symbol display part 341, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed.

<Step S3317>
When it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3317). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. When the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3318, and when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: No), Since it can be determined that it is not any of the fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3318>
When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. Judgment is made (step S3318). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3319, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S3318: No), the process proceeds to step S3321.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. (Step S3319). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the symbol display unit 341 with the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), and the specific effect determined in step S3319. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3320), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, in the display part 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, a specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3321>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3318: No), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3321), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, in the symbol display part 341, the touch operation effect in the 4th touch operation reception period R4 is performed.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, if it is determined that an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, a plurality of detections are performed if the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. The touch operation effect is not executed by ignoring the detection results of the sensors 38a to 38d. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished because the touch operation effect that should be executed is not executed.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the movable accessory member operating flag is turned on in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341. When set, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Therefore, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation effect is executed as long as the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Can be restricted. In addition, instead of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C that is not obstructed when the movable accessory member 39C is activated. Therefore, when a specific effect is executed on a display unit that is not anticipated by the player, not only what type (expected degree) of touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the effect is executed It can also be noted that. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the symbol display unit Instead of executing the touch operation effect in 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, and the lottery result is a probable big hit. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C as a condition. In this way, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, instead of executing the touch operation effect in the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed in the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game, and it is possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game on the condition that the lottery result is a promising big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341. The specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, but the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 may be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

  In the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the specific effect is not necessarily received for all the touch operations. It is not necessary to perform in a period, and a specific effect should just be performed in at least one operation reception period.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display unit 391B has been described. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display unit 341 but also on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when the main movable accessory member 39A is determined to be operated (main movable accessory member 39A). From the stage in which the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the start of the operation) until the stage in which the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position after the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed. ), The case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

  In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 including the movable accessory member 39C having the display unit 392C has been described. Moreover, in the above-mentioned 6th Embodiment, in the touch operation reception period R1-R4 for performing the touch operation presentation with respect to the touch operation in the predetermined area | region of the front side of the symbol display part 341, a movable member member operating flag is set. When it is set to ON (from the stage where it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39C (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39C is started) until the return of the movable accessory member 39C is confirmed. In the meantime, the case where the specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C has been described.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is common to the fourth embodiment described above in that it includes a main movable accessory member and a sub movable accessory member having a display unit, while the sixth embodiment described above. Unlike the fourth embodiment described above, the main movable accessory member includes a display unit, but is common to the sixth embodiment described above.

  In the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the touch operation reception period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation on the front side of the display portion of the sub movable accessory member. When the touch operation on the front side of the display part of the sub movable accessory member is performed, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display part of the main movable accessory member, This is different from the fourth and sixth embodiments described above.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment and the sixth embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 are diagrams illustrating an example of the specific effect executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. 58 is an example in which the specific effect is executed when the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is not executed (first touch operation reception period R1), and FIG. 59 is the touch operation reception effect. This is an example in which a specific effect is executed when is executed (third touch operation reception period R3).

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is not executed, but in the first touch operation reception period R1, the sub movable accessory member 39B When the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B is performed and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the main movable accessory member is not the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of 39A.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is executed, and the display of the sub movable accessory member 39B is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3. Even when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the portion 391B, the main movable accessory is not the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the member 39A.

  In the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B, the main movable combination member operating flag is set. When it is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B as in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 49). Further, the specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (the expectation degree of jackpot), or may be an effect unrelated to the result of the jackpot lottery result. It is executed as an effect to be shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the main movable accessory member operating flag is turned on as in the fourth embodiment described above. While being set (from the stage where it is determined that the main movable accessory member 39A is to be operated (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started)) The detection result of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored until the return of the main movable combination member 39A is confirmed and the main movable combination member 39A is in the standby position. The execution of the touch operation effect is restricted (steps S3101 to S3106 in FIG. 60).

  Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the sub movable combination when the main movable combination member operating flag is set to OFF in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. When an object is present on the front side of the display unit 391B of the object member 39B, instead of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the touch operation effect on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A Different specific effects are executed (steps S3401 to S3105 and steps S3407 to S3110 in FIG. 61).

<Steps S3101 to S3106>
As shown in FIG. 60, when there is an object in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 turns on the main movable accessory member operating flag. If it is set to (step S3102: Yes), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated without executing the touch operation effect. On the other hand, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3102: No), on the condition that it is the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3103 or Yes in S3105), a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104 or S3106).

<Step S3400>
As shown in FIG. 61, when the MPU 51 does not determine that the main touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (the object does not exist in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)). Case) (step S3401: NO), it is determined whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3400). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 or the sub movable accessory member and executing a specific effect on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A, and will be described later in step S3406. Alternatively, it is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3411. Whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 has been transmitted, for example, when an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3104, S3106, and later-described steps S3405, S3406, S3410, or S3411. The determination can be made by setting the flag to ON and confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3400: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S3401.

<Step S3401>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags (sub movable). It is determined whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3401). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the touch operation (sub-touch operation state) (sub-touch operation state) on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continued sub-touch operation. Specifically, in the MPU 51, when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is “off”, “on”, and “off”, the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation. When the combination of the three sub-touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the sub-touch operation continuation (see FIG. 46B).

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3401: YES), the process proceeds to step S3402, and the sub detection operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is not determined that the touch operation effect has been determined (step S3401: NO), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3403, and when it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: No), the process is performed as a step. The process moves to S3407.

<Step S3403>
When it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. Is determined (step S3403). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3403: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3404 and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3403: NO), the process proceeds to step S3406.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3403: YES), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Is determined (step S3404). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), step S3404. A specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined in step 392A on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thus, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. The

<Step S3406>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A first touch operation effect execution command to be executed is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3406), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed on the display unit 391B.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3408, and when it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: No), the touch operation is performed. The effect execution process ends.

<Step S3408>
When it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. Is determined (step S3408). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3409, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3408: No), the process proceeds to step S3411.

<Steps S3409 and S3410>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Is determined (step S3409). Then, the MPU 51 instead of causing the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23), step S3409. A specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A to execute the specific effect determined in (4) is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3410), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thus, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the third touch operation reception period R3 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. The

<Step S3411>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3408: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A third touch operation effect execution command to be executed is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3411), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed on the display unit 391B.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, when it is determined that a touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (when an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), If the object member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is not executed by ignoring the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished because the touch operation effect that should be executed is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is movable in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. When the accessory member operating flag is set to ON, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the touch is performed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. A specific effect different from the operation effect is executed. Therefore, in the first or third touch operation reception period R1, R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Can be restricted. In addition, in the first or third touch operation reception period R1, R3, the visual recognition is not hindered when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated instead of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. The specific effect is executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, when a specific effect is executed on a display unit that is not anticipated by the player, not only what type (expected degree) of touch operation effect is executed, but also on which display unit the effect is executed It can also be noted that. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. The specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A on condition that the lottery result is a probable big hit. In this way, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B, the display unit of the main movable combination member 39A If the specific performance is executed at 392A, the game's interest can be effectively improved, and the game's interest can be improved more effectively on the condition that the lottery result is a promising big hit. Can be made.

  In the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is displayed. Although the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of executing the above, the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B may be executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display unit 391B has been described. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display unit 341 but also on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, while the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when the main movable accessory member 39A is determined to be operated (main movable accessory member 39A). From the stage in which the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the start of the operation) until the stage in which the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position after the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed. ), The case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is common to the fourth embodiment described above in that it includes a main movable accessory member and a sub movable accessory member having a display unit, but on the front side of the symbol display unit. When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period or the fourth touch operation reception period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation in the predetermined area, the sub movable A touch operation reception effect is executed on the display portion of the accessory member, and a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display portion of the main movable accessory member by a touch operation on the front side of the display portion of the sub movable accessory member. This is different from the fourth embodiment described above.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is actuated during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, or during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. Is started, instead of the touch operation effect, the touch operation reception effect is executed not on the symbol display unit 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed but on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Then, during the fourth touch operation reception period R4, while the touch operation reception effect is being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B, the presence of an object on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

  Although not shown, when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the second touch operation acceptance period R2, or when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated, the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is started. Even in this case, the touch operation reception effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, not on the symbol display unit 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed. In the second touch operation reception period R2, the presence of an object is present on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

  Further, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, if the main movable accessory member operating flag is not set to ON, a touch operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

  The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (expected expectation of jackpot), or may be an effect unrelated to the result of the jackpot lottery. It is executed as an effect to be shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIGS. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, at least a part of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 and the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON overlap. In this case, the execution of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is restricted, and the touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. When the touch operation is performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being performed, the touch operation effect is different on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. A specific performance is executed.

<Step S3500>
As shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3500). The effect execution command causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect, causes the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C to execute a specific effect different from the touch operation effect, and displays the sub movable accessory member 39B. It is a command for causing the touch operation reception effect or the touch operation effect to be executed in 391B, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513, and S3109, S3111, or S3516 in FIG. Whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined when an effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513, and S3109, S3111, or S3516 in FIG. The determination can be made by setting the transmitted flag to ON and checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has transmitted the effect execution command (step S3500: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3514. When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the process proceeds to step S3501. Transition.

<Step S3501>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub touch operation pattern flags (sub movable). It is determined whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3501). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the touch operation (sub-touch operation state) (sub-touch operation state) on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation or the continued sub-touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the start of the sub-touch operation when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When the combination of the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the sub-touch operation continuation (see FIG. 46B).

  Here, when it is determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3108 in FIG. 64 and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D perform the sub touch operation. If it is not determined that has been detected (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
When it is not determined that the sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3502). . Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 is determined. You may judge by operating a counter. If the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503. If the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3502: No), the process is stepped. The process moves to S3508.

<Step S3503>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. Is determined (step S3503). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3504, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3503: No), the process proceeds to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific effect reception flag to ON (step S3504). This specific effect acceptance flag is displayed on the display portion 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4. This is a flag indicating that a touch operation for executing a touch operation effect is received by the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and is referred to in step S3514 described later. Then, the MPU 51 transmits a touch operation reception effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and ends the touch operation effect execution process. Thus, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B, the main movable combination is displayed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. The touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect is received on the display unit 392C of the object member 39C is executed.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3503: No), the MPU 51 performs main touch by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not an operation has been detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25)) (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state of the touch operation (main touch operation state) (main touch operation state) for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of touch operation or the continuation of touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “off”, “on”, and “off”. When the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, it is determined that the main touch operation state corresponds to the main touch operation continuation (FIG. 46 (A )reference). When the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. The second touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3507), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when there is no object in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3508>
When it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3508). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3708: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3509. If it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3708: No), the touch operation is performed. The effect execution process ends.

<Step S3509>
When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member 39A is operating is set to ON. Is determined (step S3509). Here, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3510, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3509: No), the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific effect reception flag to ON as in step S3504 (step S3510), and the touch operation reception effect. An execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3611), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated. Thus, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B, the main movable combination is displayed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable combination member 39B. The touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect is received on the display unit 392C of the object member 39C is executed.

<Steps S3512 and S3513>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3509: No), the MPU 51 performs the main operation based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags in the same procedure as step S3506. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation has been detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (a specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341). Then, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. A fourth touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3513), and the touch operation effect execution process ends. Thereby, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed in the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3514>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific effect reception flag set to ON in step S3510 or S3516 is set to ON (step S3514). Here, when the reception flag for specific effect is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3515 in FIG. 64 and the reception flag for specific effect is set to OFF. (Step S3501: No), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Step S3515>
When the specific effect reception flag is set to ON (step S3514: Yes), as shown in FIG. 64, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. (Step S3515). When the MPU 51 is in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4 (step S3515: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3516, and is not in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4. (Step S3515: No), the process proceeds to step S3519.

<Step S3516>
When it is the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the same procedure as step S3501 in FIG. 63 based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not a sub touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B) (step S3516). Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3517, and the sub detection operation is detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. If it is not determined that the touch operation effect has been determined (step S3516: NO), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When it is determined that the sub touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. ) Is determined (step S3517). Then, the MPU 51 transmits a specific effect execution command for executing the specific effect determined in step S3517 on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C to the display control device 6 (step S3618), and the touch operation effect. The execution process is terminated. Thereby, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. .

<Step S3519>
When it is not the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2 or R4 (step S3515: No), or when the specific effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3618), the specific effect reception flag is set to OFF. Then, the touch operation effect execution process ends. In other words, when the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4 ends, or when it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed, the specific effect flag that allows the specific effect to be executed is turned off. To end the acceptance for executing the specific effect.

<Steps S3108 to S3111>
If there is an object on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3507: Yes), the MPU 51 is on condition that it is the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3. (Yes in step S3108 or S3110), the first or third touch operation effect execution command for causing the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111). Then, the MPU 51 transmits the first or third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111), or when it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 ( In step S3108 or S3110, No), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

  By the way, in above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, if a movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON when an object exists in the predetermined area | region of the front side of the symbol display part 341, several detection sensor 38a-. By ignoring the detection result at 38d, the touch operation effect is not executed. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished because the touch operation effect that should be executed is not executed.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, at least one of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 and the period during which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. When the portions overlap, the execution of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is restricted, and the touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. When the touch operation is performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being performed, the touch operation effect is different on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. A specific performance is executed. Therefore, in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341, even if the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation is performed. The reception effect is executed. In addition, in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the sub movable combination whose visual recognition is not hindered when the main movable combination member 39A is operated. The touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the member 39B, and the specific operation is executed by performing the touch operation on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B during the execution of the touch operation reception effect. Therefore, a touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit that the player does not expect, and a specific effect is executed by performing a touch operation on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B in response to an unexpected touch operation reception. . This allows the player to focus on not only what type (expectation) of touch operation effects are executed, but also on which display part the effects are executed. It is possible to suppress the interest in the game from fading and improve the interest of the game.

  When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. Alternatively, the previous touch operation reception effect or the specific effect may be executed on condition that the lottery result is a probable big hit. In this way, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, instead of executing the touch operation effect in the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation reception effect or the specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game more effectively on the condition that the lottery result is a promising big hit.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a movable accessory member actuating effect in which the movable accessory member moves between the standby position and the actuating position is executed, and the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case where the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected has been described. In the first embodiment described above, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when it is determined that the movable accessory member 39 is to be operated (the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is From the time immediately before starting until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. .

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the movable accessory member operation effect, the fake operation in which the movable accessory member is moved between the standby position and an intermediate position set between the standby position and the operation position. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that an effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, a single detection sensor 38 is provided, and the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the detection sensor 38, which is different from the first embodiment described above. Different.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 65 is a movable combination referred to when the effect pattern type is a special reach effect in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the object member operation timing selection table C. In FIG. 65, “◎” indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is actuated as a jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect), and “◯” indicates a movable accessory member as a chance-up effect (a jackpot expectation suggesting effect). 39 is operated, “Δ” indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is fake-operated (the movable accessory member is operated not to the standby position but to an intermediate position), and “×” indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is Is not activated, “-” means that there is no corresponding activation period.

  Here, FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the fake operation effect of the movable accessory member executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66, in the fake operation effect, the movable position member 39 at the standby position moves to the intermediate position set between the operation position (the position indicated by the phantom line) and the standby position. Return to. In addition, a detection sensor 38 that detects the presence of an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is disposed in the central portion on the right side of the symbol display unit 341. In the detection sensor 38, the movable accessory member 39 is not detected when the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position or the intermediate position, and the movable accessory member 39 is not detected when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. Detected.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 65, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C that is referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect pattern is the effect pattern type (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special reach effect patterns. Every time, according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery, whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is operated at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether or not the movable accessory member operation effect is executed) Whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is to be fake-operated is defined.

  For example, when the production pattern type is the production pattern Z1 and the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member 39 is fake-operated at the operation timing G2 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and at the operation timing G3. The movable accessory member 39 is operated, and the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the remaining operation timings G1, G4 to G6. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z3 and the lottery result is 16R probability variation big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations. At the timings G1 to G4, the movable accessory member 39 is neither actuated nor fake-actuated. That is, when the production pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and at the end. An operation effect is executed.

  When the production pattern type is the production pattern Z4 and the lottery result is 16R probability variation big hit, the fake operation production is executed at the operation timing G2 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the operation timings G3, G5, and G5. Thus, the movable accessory member 39 is operated, and at the remaining operation timings G1 and G4, the movable accessory member 39 is neither operated nor fake. At the operation timings G5 and G6, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed as a jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect). That is, when the production pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is 16R normal jackpot, the fake action production is executed immediately after the start of the normal reach production in the special reach production pattern, and it is movable as a chance up production immediately after the start of the super production. The accessory member operation effect is executed, and the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect (single notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect and at the end of the special reach effect.

  65 shows the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C that is referred to when the production pattern type is a special reach production, but the production pattern type is a normal reach production pattern or a super reach production pattern. In addition, the movable accessory member 39 may be fake-operated.

[Moveable member operation]
Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the movable accessory member operation process, in addition to the operation up to the operation position of the movable accessory member 39, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 to the intermediate position is controlled.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 or not. That is, the MPU 51 starts the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 27 and 65) in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery. It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the time point has been reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3602, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S3606.

<Steps S3602-S3605>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 by the fake operation (step S3602). When it is the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 by the fake operation (step S3602: Yes), the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 is connected to the motor accessory 39. A first operation start signal for moving from the standby position to the intermediate position is output (step S3603), and the movable accessory member operation process ends. Accordingly, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the intermediate position.

  On the other hand, when it is not the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 due to the fake operation (step S3602: No), that is, when it is the timing to operate the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operation position, A second operation start signal for moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force (step S3604). Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to ON (step S3605), and ends the movable accessory member operation processing. Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position.

<Steps S3606 and S3607>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606). That is, the MPU 51 ends the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery. It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the time point has been reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. Then (step S3607), the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Thereby, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position or the intermediate position to the standby position.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
If it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detector 39b ( Step S3608). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the intermediate position to the standby position based on the fake operation. (Step S3609). When the MPU 51 returns the movable accessory member 39 from the intermediate position based on the fake operation to the standby position (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process, and the movable accessory member based on the fake operation. If it is not return to the standby position of 39 (step S3609: No), that is, if the movable accessory member 39 is return from the operating position to the standby position, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF and the movable The accessory member operation process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the intermediate position, the movable accessory member 39 is not detected by the detection sensor 38. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the intermediate position, that is, when the movable accessory member 39 performs a fake operation, the touch operation effect is provided on the condition that the touch operation is performed during the touch operation reception period. Is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted until the fake operation of the movable accessory member 39, and to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted more than necessary, Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed by ignoring the detection signal from the detection sensor 38 as in the first embodiment. It may be restricted that the touch operation effect is executed by not performing the process of confirming the detection from the detection sensor 38 as in the above-described second embodiment. In other words, the limitation on the execution of the touch operation effect between the time when it is determined that the motor 39a is driven to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position and the time when the driving of the motor 39a is started. And the restriction on execution of the touch operation effect may be released when the return detection unit 39b detects that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position.

  Further, when the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON and the touch operation reception period overlap, a specific effect (see FIG. 40) may be executed instead of the touch operation effect. . In this case, the specific effect is such that the movable accessory member 39A includes a display unit (see FIG. 54), and the movable accessory member 39A may be executed on the display unit, or the sub movable having the display unit. It may be made to be performed by the display part of a sub movable accessory member as what has an accessory member (refer to Drawing 43).

[Tenth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a movable accessory member actuating effect in which the movable accessory member moves between the standby position and the actuating position is executed, and the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case where the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected has been described. In the above-described first embodiment, when the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39 is operating is set to ON, the detection by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d is performed. The case where the result is ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted has been described.

  On the other hand, this embodiment starts the operation of the movable accessory member when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period (movable) The execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is limited by not executing the process of starting the accessory member operation effect), which is different from the first embodiment described above.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Moveable member operation]
In the movable accessory member actuating process of the present embodiment, a process of moving the movable accessory member between the standby position and the actuating position is executed in the same manner as the movable accessory member actuating process of the first embodiment described above. However, it is different from the movable accessory member operation process of the first embodiment described above in that the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started in any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. .

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing in FIG. 23) (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the starting point of the time has been reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3702, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S3705.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702). Whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It may be determined by operating a counter for determining whether or not. Here, when the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 operates on the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. Output a start signal. Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the movable accessory member (step S3704), and ends the movable accessory member operation process.

  On the other hand, when it is the 1st-4th touch operation reception period R1-R4 (step S2702: Yes), MPU51 ends the movable accessory member operation processing. That is, in this embodiment, even if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Thereby, the action | operation (execution of a movable accessory member action | operation effect) of the movable accessory member 39 in the 1st-4th touch operation reception period R1-R4 is restrict | limited.

<Step S3705>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 set in step S3704 (step S3705). Here, when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (Step S3706), the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position. On the other hand, when it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3704: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process.

  As described above, as a conventional gaming machine, as in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable gaming effect, a movable accessory member operation effect that activates a movable accessory member or within a touch operation reception period. There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by a player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, a touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed due to the movement of the movable accessory member within the touch operation reception period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, and a touch operation effect may be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is used in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 in which a touch operation for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a touch operation effect is received. Even at this operation start timing, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started, and the movable accessory member operation effect is not executed. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but at least the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. What is necessary is just to restrict | limit the action | operation of the movable accessory member 39 in one touch operation reception period. For example, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in the first and second touch operation acceptance periods R1, R2, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3, R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member actuating effect without doing so.

[Eleventh embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, the movable accessory member is determined when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is limited by not executing the process of starting operation 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

  On the other hand, this embodiment starts the operation of the movable accessory member when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period (movable) This is the same as the tenth embodiment in that the process for starting the accessory member operation effect) is not executed, but the operation of the movable accessory member starts after the end of the touch operation reception period (the movable accessory member operation effect is displayed). This is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that it is started.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Moveable member operation]
The movable accessory member actuation process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the movable accessory member actuation process of the tenth embodiment described above, but the start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is the first to fourth touches. In the operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is suspended (step S3801), and the operation of the suspended movable accessory member 39 ends the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. This is different from the movable accessory member actuating process of the tenth embodiment described above (steps S3802, S3803, and S3703).

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 69, when the MPU 51 is the start time (operation start timing) of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the first When it is-4th touch operation reception period R1-R4 (step S3702: Yes), an accessory operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3801). This accessory action hold flag is a flag for starting the action of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member action effect) after the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and will be described later. Referenced in S3802.

  In addition, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702: No), and the tenth described above. Similarly to the embodiment, an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3703), and the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If it is neither the operation start timing nor the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (both No in steps S3701 and S3705), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the accessory operation suspension flag set to ON in step S3801 is set to ON. Judgment is made (step S3802). When the accessory operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes), when it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3803: NO), the process proceeds to step S3703. In other words, when the accessory operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes), an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c at the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Then, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) is started (step S3703), and the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position. As in the tenth embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 in the standby position outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c when the return timing set in step S3704 is reached (step S3705: Yes). As a result (step S3706), the standby position is restored.

  By the way, in the above-described tenth embodiment, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable combination is performed. By not performing the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the operation of the movable object member operation), it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 has been performed by the operation of the movable object member 39. To prevent that. However, since the movable accessory member actuating effect in which the movable accessory member 39 is actuated is usually executed as a chance-up effect or a jackpot finalizing effect, if such a highly anticipated effect is not executed, the interest in the game There is a concern that interest and interest will decline.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described tenth embodiment, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. However, unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the touch operation reception period R1 is not executed, although the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. After the end of ~ R4, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed. That is, it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 by preventing the movable accessory member operation effect from being started in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. While the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are finished, a movable accessory member actuating effect that is generally executed as a highly anticipated effect is executed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest and interest in the game. .

  In this embodiment, the suspended movable accessory member operation effect is started after the end of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is confirmed, but the start timing of the suspended movable accessory member operation effect is You may set irrespective of the completion | finish of touch operation reception period R1-R4. For example, when the touch operation effect is executed, it may be after the touch operation effect ends or after it is confirmed that the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 has been performed. In addition, the suspended movable accessory member operation effect is the end of the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 on condition that the player has not performed the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Execution may be started later.

[Twelfth embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, the movable accessory member is determined when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is limited by not executing the process of starting operation 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect). It is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not being executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Moveable member operation]
As shown in FIG. 70, in the movable accessory member actuation process of the present embodiment, unlike the movable accessory member actuation process of the tenth embodiment described above, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 on the condition that it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3902: No). It is determined whether or not (step S3902). On the other hand, in the movable accessory member actuation process of the present embodiment, if it is the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S3901: Yes), whether or not it is the actuation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether or not it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 without executing the process of determining (step S3902) (step S3905). In addition, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3902: Yes) and when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3905: Yes), the subsequent processing procedure is the tenth described above. This is the same as the embodiment.

  As described above, as a conventional gaming machine, as in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable gaming effect, a movable accessory member operation effect that activates a movable accessory member or within a touch operation reception period. There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by a player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, a touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed due to the movement of the movable accessory member within the touch operation reception period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, and a touch operation effect may be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4? The process of determining whether or not is not executed. That is, in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started, and the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but at least the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. What is necessary is just to restrict | limit the action | operation of the movable accessory member 39 in one touch operation reception period. For example, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in the first and second touch operation acceptance periods R1, R2, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3, R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member actuating effect without doing so.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment, the movable accessory member is determined when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is limited by not executing the process of starting operation 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

  On the other hand, this embodiment is basically determined to be the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period, as in the tenth embodiment described above. In this case, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premium effect is determined as an exceptional touch operation effect, the movable accessory member is operated when a specific condition is satisfied, which is different from the tenth embodiment described above. Different. Specifically, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the premier effect is executed as the touch operation effect, the front side of the symbol display unit by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation reception period. If a touch operation is not performed on the predetermined area, a jackpot finalizing effect with a forced action of the movable accessory member is executed, and a premier effect as a touch operation effect is made using a false detection due to the forced action of the movable accessory member. Executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous effect of the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied, a continuous effect of a movable accessory member operation effect and a touch operation effect is executed. For example, when the premier effect is selected as the touch operation effect, the player starts the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 and the predetermined time set shorter than the touch operation reception period R1 to R4 elapses. When the touch operation is not performed, a jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed, and the movable accessory member 39 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. Thus, the premier effect determined as the touch operation effect is executed.

  Here, the jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. This is an effect of generating a rainbow effect Ef in the vicinity. In addition, as the jackpot finalizing effect (single notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, for example, a rainbow lamp executed by a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape around the peripheral portion of the movable accessory member 39. It is conceivable that the operating mode of the production and the movable accessory member 39 is a special operating mode different from the normal mode. In addition, the premier effect is an effect that has an extremely low selection rate compared to other effects, and is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In the present embodiment, the premiere effect is a probability variation jackpot finalization effect that is selected only when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, a group of gold fish (goldfish school) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. This is an image effect that moves from right to left. Of course, the premier effect may be another effect such as an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low compared to other characters is displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

[Moveable member operation]
Here, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  The movable accessory member activation process of the present embodiment is performed when the movable accessory member is activated when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing for starting the movable accessory member actuation effect) during the touch operation reception period. This is common to the tenth embodiment in that the process for starting the operation (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the premier effect is determined as an exceptional touch operation effect, the player touches a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation reception period. When no operation is performed, a jackpot finalizing effect with a forced action of the movable accessory member is executed, and a premier effect as a touch operation effect is executed by using a false detection due to the forced action of the movable accessory member. This is different from the tenth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4001 to S4006>
As shown in FIG. 72, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 has the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4002: Yes). On the other hand, when the movable accessory member operation process is finished, if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4002: No), an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to move the movable accessory. The member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position (step S4003), the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set (step S4004), and the movable accessory member operating process is terminated. Thereby, like the above-mentioned 10th Embodiment, in the 1st-4th touch operation reception period R1-R4, the process which starts the action | operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not performed, but the movable accessory member 39 of FIG. Operation is limited.

  Similarly to the above-described tenth embodiment, the MPU 51, when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4001: No), is the return timing (step S4005: Yes), the motor driver 39c. A return signal is output to return the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position (step S4006), and the movable accessory member operating process is terminated.

<Step S4007>
Even when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (both No in steps S4001 and S4005), the MPU 51 executes processing different from that of the tenth embodiment. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007), and if there is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes). The process proceeds to step S4008, and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: No), the movable accessory member operation process is terminated.

<Step S4008>
When it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. (Step S4008) If the predetermined time has elapsed (step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4009. If the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S4008: No), the movable accessory member actuating process is performed. Exit. Here, the predetermined time is a limit for deciding to forcibly actuate the movable accessory member 39, and in order to execute a touch operation effect using a malfunction of the movable accessory member 39, the first to first It is set to a time shorter than the 4-touch operation reception period R1 to R4. This predetermined time may be set to the same time in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, or may be set individually for each of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Also good.

<Step S4009>
When the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4008). S4009). This forcible operation flag is displayed when the player does not perform a touch operation until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, that is, until the predetermined time elapses. This is a flag for forcibly actuating the movable accessory member 39 when the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the unit 341 is not confirmed, and steps S4105 and S4109 of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. , S4113 or S4117 is set to ON.

  Here, when the forced operation flag is set on (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4010, and when the forced operation flag is not set on (step S4009: No), The movable accessory member actuating process is terminated.

<Step S4010>
When the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 transmits a confirmed operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4010). Thereby, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute an image effect accompanying the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39. In the present embodiment, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 displays an image effect that generates a rainbow effect Ef (see FIG. 71) around the movable accessory member 39 at the timing when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. The display unit 341 is executed.

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits a confirmed operation effect execution command to the display control device 6, the process proceeds to step S4003. Thereby, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started, and the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the operating position to the standby position at the return timing set in step S4004 (steps S4004 to S4006). That is, if the touch operation is not performed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (both Yes in steps S4007 and S4008), the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect. Thus, based on the forcible operation flag set to ON, the movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated even if it is not the operation start timings G1 to G6 (see FIG. 27) of the movable accessory member 39.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  The touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment is basically the same as that of the tenth embodiment described above, but when the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated. This is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that the forcible operation flag is set to ON.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 73, in steps S4101 to S4103, it is determined that the touch operation has been detected by the detection sensor 38 based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags, as in the above-described tenth embodiment. (When an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area of the panel 25)) (step S4101: Yes), if it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S4102: Yes) Then, a first touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the first touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4103).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4103), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premium effect is determined as the first touch operation effect. If it is present (step S4104: YES), the forcible operation flag that enables the forcible operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4105), and the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
In steps S4106 and S4107, similarly to the above-described tenth embodiment, when it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S4106: Yes), the second touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is performed. A second touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4107).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the second touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4107), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premier effect is determined as the second touch operation effect. If it is present (step S4108: Yes), the forcible operation flag that enables the forcible operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4109), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4110 to S4113>
In steps S4110 and S4111, in the same manner as in the tenth embodiment described above, when it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S4110: Yes), the third touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is performed. A third touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4111).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4111), the premier effect is determined as the third touch operation effect, unlike the tenth embodiment described above. If it is present (step S4112: Yes), the forcible operation flag that enables the forcible operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4113), and the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S4114 to S4117>
In steps S4114 and S4115, similarly to the above-described tenth embodiment, when it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S4114: Yes), the fourth touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is performed. A fourth touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4115).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits a fourth touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4115), the premier effect is determined as the fourth touch operation effect, unlike the tenth embodiment described above. If it is present (step S4116: Yes), the forcible operation flag that enables the forcible operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4117), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, even when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is reached in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not executed. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited. Thereby, it can prevent that a touch operation effect will be performed contrary to a player's will by the false detection based on the action | operation of the movable accessory member 39. FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the premier effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member when there is no touch operation by the player after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The jackpot finalizing effect is executed by forcibly operating 39, and the premier effect determined as the touch operation effect by the erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed. Therefore, even though the touch operation is not performed while the touch operation is received, the player can be surprised by the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 that is difficult for the player to expect. And can improve interest.

  Furthermore, by using the false detection based on the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39, the premier effect is forcibly executed as the touch operation effect regardless of the player's intention, so that the selection rate selected at the corner is extremely high. It is possible to prevent the execution of a low premier effect from being skipped (cancelled). As a result, when a premier effect that is rarely seen is determined as a touch operation effect, the premier effect can be reliably shown to the player.

  In addition, by using a false detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39, “(touch operation effect →) jackpot finalizing effect with forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 → premier effect” is unprecedented. A series of shocking and interesting effects can be realized. Thereby, the interest and interest in a game can be improved significantly.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited by not executing the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. However, the method for restricting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be another method. For example, in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited by not performing the process of determining whether it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. (For example, the twelfth embodiment).

  Also, the premier effect may be executed as a jackpot finalizing effect instead of a promising jackpot finalizing effect.

  Furthermore, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the forcible operation flag can be set on in all the touch operation reception periods of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the first to fourth touches The forced operation flag may be set to ON in at least one touch operation reception period among the operation reception periods R1 to R4. In this case, it is preferable that the forced operation flag can be set to ON in one or both of the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed.

[Fourteenth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 including two movable accessory members, that is, the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display unit 391B has been described. In addition, the sub movable accessory member 39B of the fourth embodiment described above is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range that is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, in the gaming machine 10 including one movable accessory member 39, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (movable accessory member operation effect is displayed during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. In the case where it is determined that it is the timing to start, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes two movable accessory members (a main movable accessory member 39A and a sub movable accessory member 39B having a display portion 391B) similar to those in the fourth embodiment described above. In the touch operation reception period, the process for starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is not executed, while the process for starting the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed. Is different.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above.

[Moveable member operation]
Here, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the movable accessory member actuating process of the present embodiment, a process of actuating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of actuating the movable accessory member 39 of the tenth embodiment described above ( Steps S4201 to S4206). In the movable accessory member actuating process of the present embodiment, a process for operating the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed in the same procedure as in the fourth embodiment, unlike the tenth embodiment. (Steps S4207 to S4210).

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 74, in step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines the operation timing G2, G4, G6 of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variation display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the big hit lottery (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not a value corresponding to the starting point of the time has been reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4202, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4201: No). ), And the process proceeds to step S4205.

<Steps S4202 to S4204>
When it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202). Whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It may be determined by operating a counter for determining whether or not. Here, when the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202: No), the motor driver that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. An operation start signal is output to 39c (step S4203), and the movable accessory member operation process is terminated. Accordingly, the motor driver 39c controls the first motor 39a1 to move the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4204), and ends the movable accessory member operation process.

  On the other hand, when it is the 1st-4th touch operation reception period R1-R4 (step S4202: Yes), MPU51 complete | finishes the said movable accessory member operation | movement process. That is, in this embodiment, even if it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The movable accessory member actuating process is terminated without doing so. Thereby, the action | operation of 39 A of main movable accessory members in the 1st-4th touch operation reception period R1-R4 is restrict | limited.

<Steps S4205 to S4210>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 drives the first motor 39a1 when it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4205: Yes). A return signal is output to the driver 39c (step S4206), and when it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S4207: Yes), the second to apply a driving force to the sub movable accessory member 39B. An operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a2 (step S4208), and when it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S4209: Yes), the sub movable accessory member 39B is driven. A motor for driving the second motor 39a2 for applying force And it outputs a return signal to the coater driver 39c (step S4210).

  Note that the MPU 51 is any of the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B. If not (No in steps S4201, S4205, S4207, and S4209), the movable accessory member actuating process is terminated. Also, when an operation start signal or a return signal is output to the motor driver 39c (steps S4206, S4208, or S4210), the movable accessory member operation process is terminated.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main movable accessory is not executed by executing the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the member 39A is limited. This prevents erroneous detection that a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 based on the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the process of starting the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed. The operation of is not limited. Here, the sub movable accessory member 39B of the present embodiment is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range that is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, in this embodiment, even if the sub movable accessory member 39B is operated, no erroneous detection occurs. For this reason, the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is not limited, so that the operation is prevented from being unnecessarily limited to the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B that does not cause a malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect from being excessively limited, and to suppress a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

  In the present embodiment, when the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are performed, the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is not executed, so that the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is performed. Although limited, the method of limiting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A may be another method. For example, in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is limited by not executing the process of determining whether it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A. You may make it (refer the above-mentioned 12th Embodiment).

  In the present embodiment, the sub movable combination member 39B includes the display unit 391B. However, the sub movable combination member 39B may not include the display unit 391B.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when execution of the main movable accessory member operation effect is restricted in the reception periods R1 to R4, execution of the main movable accessory member operation effect is suspended, and the suspended main movable accessory member The operation effect may be executed after the end of the reception periods R1 to R4 or after the end of the touch operation effect (see the above-described eleventh embodiment).

[Fifteenth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of an object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are set while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. The case has been described where the detection result of the object is ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is restricted.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, the movable combination is determined when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable combination member 39 (timing for starting the movable combination member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the touch operation reception period overlaps with the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited when the movable accessory member operation effect is started first. When the touch operation reception period is started first, the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is limited, which is different from the first and tenth embodiments described above.

  For example, when the movable accessory member operation effect is started before the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member is operating as in the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment described above. While the flag is set on, the detection results of the objects by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted (see FIG. 37). Of course, in this embodiment, the same configuration as that of the above-described second to ninth embodiments is adopted, and the touch operation effect execution processing similar to that of the aforementioned second to ninth embodiments is executed, so that it is movable. Execution of the touch operation effect may be restricted during the operation of the accessory member.

  Further, when the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are started before the movable accessory member operation effect, as in the tenth embodiment, the movable accessory members are used in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. If it is determined that it is the operation start timing 39 (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect), the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. Thus, the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted (see FIG. 68). Of course, in the present embodiment, by adopting the same configuration as the above-described 11th to 14th embodiments, and executing the movable accessory member actuation process similar to the above 11th to 14th embodiments, You may restrict | limit that a movable accessory member operation effect is performed in a touch operation reception period.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has an advantage in the case where the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted during the operation of the movable accessory member, and the case where the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted during the touch operation reception period. And enjoy the benefits. That is, when the touch operation reception period overlaps with the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect, either when the movable accessory member operation effect starts first or when the touch operation reception period starts first Even if it exists, it is prevented that a touch operation effect is performed unnecessarily by the erroneous detection based on the action | operation of the movable accessory member 39. FIG.

[Sixteenth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the presence of an object in a predetermined region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B has been described. In the fourth embodiment described above, the case where the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B cannot detect the presence of an object in the operating region of the sub movable accessory member 39B (the left region of the symbol display unit 341) has been described. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit other than the left region of the symbol display unit is detected by the two main detection sensors. Apart from the two main detection sensors, it differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that it includes a sub-detection sensor that detects the presence of an object in the front area of the left area of the symbol display section. That is, in this embodiment, the detection range in the symbol display unit is different between the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor, and the presence of an object is individually detected by each detection sensor. When the movable accessory member does not operate and is in the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by both the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor, and when the movable accessory member operates, the symbol display is performed only by the sub detection sensor. The second embodiment is also different from the first embodiment in that the presence of an object in the front side area of the left side area of the unit is detected. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub movable movable member 39B in the fourth embodiment described above is not provided, and the fourth movable portion described above is also provided in that a movable accessory member corresponding to the main movable accessory member 39A is provided. Different from the embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 75 is a front view schematically showing detection ranges of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, and 38D with respect to the symbol display unit 341 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a movable accessory member 39, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, and a sub detection sensor 38E.

  The movable accessory member 39 is a member similar to the movable accessory member 39 of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above and the main movable accessory member 39A of the fourth embodiment described above. A first motor 39a1 between a predetermined first standby position (see FIG. 4) positioned above 341 and a second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position. It can be moved in the vertical direction along the surface of the symbol display unit 341 by the driving force from.

  The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are the same as the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 39B of the fourth embodiment described above, and the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A. And the presence of an object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is detected. The overlapping detection range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) is the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is a central area excluding the left part (operation area of the sub movable accessory member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part, and the lower right part, and can detect a touch operation in the operation area of the movable accessory member 39.

  The sub detection sensor 38E is disposed on the left side of the second main detection sensor 38B, and detects the presence of an object in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The detection range of the sub detection sensor 38E does not overlap with the overlap detection range of the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the sub detection sensor 38E can detect a touch operation in the left region of the operation region of the movable accessory member 39 that cannot be detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the detection range is shared by the first main detection sensor 38A, the second main detection sensor 38B, and the sub detection sensor 38E, and the central region within the operation range of the movable accessory member 39, and the movable accessory member The presence or absence of a touch operation is individually detected from the left side region that is outside the 39 operating range.

  In the present embodiment, the touch operation state is determined based on the touch operation detection flag for three times by the same method as in the first embodiment, and the touch operation state is the first to third touch operation pattern flags. Is stored in the RAM 412 as an ON / OFF combination (see FIG. 22B).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B that can detect the operation of the movable accessory member 39 when the movable accessory member 39 is operating during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Based on the detection result of the sub detection sensor 38E that cannot detect the operation of the movable accessory member 39 without confirming the detection result, the presence or absence of a touch operation in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is determined. When the movable accessory member 39 is not in operation during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B, and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. When the touch operation is not confirmed based on the detection result at, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection result at the sub detection sensor 38E.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 76, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4301), and is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. (Step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S4302, and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (No at Step S4301), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S4302>
When it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4302). This effect execution command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a touch operation effect, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later. Whether or not an effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined such that, for example, when a touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in later-described step S4306 or S4308, the transmitted flag is set to ON. It can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. Note that it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started by determining whether or not the effect execution flag has already been transmitted in step S4301. However, when it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state is started after the touch operation effect is ended (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation The touch operation effect may be executed again on the condition that it is a reception period.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has transmitted the effect execution command (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S4303.

<Step S4303>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member is operating is set to ON (step S4302: NO). Step S4303). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4307, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. If so (step S4303: NO), the process proceeds to step S4304.

<Step S4304>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S4303: No), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the central region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is determined whether or not a touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in the central area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4304). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S4306 and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B do not detect the touch operation. Is determined (step S4304: NO), the process proceeds to step S4305.

<Step S4305>
When it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: No), the MPU 51 sets the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (whether or not an object exists in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4305). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4305: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S4306 and determines that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. In the case (step S4305: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S4306>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B or the sub detection sensor 38E (Yes in step S4304 or S4305), the MPU 41 determines the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of the command determination process. Is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4306), and the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Step S4307>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S4303: YES), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is determined whether or not a touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (whether or not an object exists in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4307). That is, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when the movable accessory member 39 is operating) (step S4303: Yes), the touch operation for the central region is performed by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. It is determined whether or not a touch operation on the left area is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E without determining whether or not the detection is detected.

  Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S4308 and determines that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. In the case (step S4307: No), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 determines an alternative touch operation effect determination process for determining an alternative touch operation effect to be executed in the left area of the symbol display unit 341. Is executed (step S4308). And MPU41 sets the alternative touch operation effect execution command for making the symbol display part 341 perform an alternative touch operation effect, and transmits to the display control apparatus 6 (step S4308). Thereby, the alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left area of the symbol display unit 341. That is, when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, in the left region of the symbol display unit 341 that is not obstructed by the movable accessory member 39 in the operating position. An alternative touch operation effect is executed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine in which the touch operation effect and the movable accessory member operation effect are executed, the touch operation effect can be executed by erroneous detection by operating the movable accessory member 39.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is determined to be operated (the movable accessory member From the stage in which the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of 39A is started) to the stage in which the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position). The touch operation is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E have different detection ranges, and the presence or absence of an object in each detection range is individually detected. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started after the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, it is possible to restrict the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course the movable accessory member 39 is on standby. Execution of the touch operation effect before returning to the position can also be restricted. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, the left area of the symbol display portion 341 and the like can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation during the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, or when a touch operation is performed on the left side area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left area of the symbol display unit 341. Thereby, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 can be effectively used (alternative) to perform the touch operation effect, and the interest of the game is improved. The

  It should be noted that the alternative touch operation effect may display an image to be displayed in the central area of the symbol display unit 341 as the touch operation effect, or may be completely different from the touch operation effect. An image may be displayed.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a sub display in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, accepts a touch operation with this sub display, and performs a touch effect or an alternative touch operation with the sub display. An effect may be executed. In this case, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the execution of the touch effect on the sub-display is not limited. Furthermore, the sub-display may be provided on a movable accessory member that is movable (for example, in the left-right direction) in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the object is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by not checking the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B when the movable accessory member 39 is operating during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Although the execution of the touch operation effect due to the presence is limited, the object is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by ignoring the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B when the movable accessory member 39 is operating. Execution of the touch operation effect due to the presence may be limited.

  In the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E detect the presence of an object, while the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. The presence of an object is detected only by the sub detection sensor 38E when it does not exist. However, when other conditions (specific conditions) are satisfied, a part of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E detect It is also conceivable to detect the presence of an object. For example, when some of the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B and one sub detection sensor 38E are out of order, the presence of an object is detected by the remaining detection sensors that are not out of order. In the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the movable accessory member 39 is individually detected by each of the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the one sub detection sensor 38E. It is possible to check whether each of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, and 38E is out of order by determining whether or not is in the operating position.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals for the sake of convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. It is not a thing. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A0]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position) and is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). A movable accessory member (39) to be played;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for restricting execution of one of the first production and the second production in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect restricting means in the overlap period. Therefore, when the detection means detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, there is a disadvantage that the first effect is executed due to erroneous detection that the object is based on the player's action. It can be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix A1]
The game machine according to appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits execution of the first effect in the overlap period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restricting means in the overlap period, so that the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed.

[Appendix A2]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38a) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein execution of the first effect is limited when the presence of an object is detected by ~ 38d).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, since the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted even when the presence of the object is detected by the detection means, the first effect is caused by a false detection by a simple process in the overlap period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix A3]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38a) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. The game machine according to appendix A1, wherein the execution of the process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected is limited by -38d).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the detection means in the specific period is not executed, the execution of the first effect in the overlap period can be restricted, so that the simple process Therefore, it is possible to prevent detection effects from being executed due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix A4]
Drive means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
The effect limiting means starts limiting the execution of the first effect after it is determined to drive the drive means (39a) until the drive of the drive means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A3, characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A5]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b);
The effect restricting means removes the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note A1 to Supplementary Note A4, wherein:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, when the return of the movable accessory member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A6]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The effect execution means (51) causes the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift the second effect to the special game state in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when executing as an effect (a jackpot finalizing effect or a one-notification notification effect) clearly indicating that the object is the predetermined area The game machine according to appendix A0, wherein the game effect of a type corresponding to the situation when the presence of an object is detected is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected when performing an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state in the overlap period, A type of game effect corresponding to the situation when the presence of the object is detected is executed. Therefore, the execution of the first effect can be restricted throughout the game effects in a situation where game arousal is likely to occur. Thereby, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved. In addition, in a situation where it is difficult for the game to awaken, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so that the first effect can be prevented from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix A7]
When the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of the object in the predetermined region during the overlap period, the effect executing unit (51) The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein an effect according to a type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix A8]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (variable game effect) executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the player of the determination result in the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) that is executed from the start time of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the basic effect ends, and the first development effect. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
When the second development effect is being executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the overlap period, Limit execution,
The production execution means (51)
The gaming machine according to appendix A7, further comprising a specific effect executing unit that executes a specific effect different from the first effect when the execution of the first effect is limited by the effect limiting unit.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A7 and Supplementary Note A8, an effect corresponding to the type of game effect being executed when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlap period. For example, when the game effect being executed when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlap period is a second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, even if the low expectation effect that the determination result hardly expects to shift to the special gaming state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is actuated. Therefore, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix A9]
The first effect execution means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the overlap period. The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9, even if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the overlap period, the first effect is executed if the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed. The first effect is executed by the means. For this reason, even when a low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected during the overlap period due to operation of a movable accessory member, etc., the first effect is executed as scheduled, so that the game It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first performance while preventing the awakening of the first effect.

[Appendix A10]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (a third touch operation reception period, a fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (a touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is being executed,
The effect execution means (51) executes the first effect by the effect restriction means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8 or Supplementary A9, wherein the specific effect execution means causes the specific effect different from the first effect to be executed.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit during the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect), the execution of the first effect is restricted by the production restriction unit. A specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, in the case where the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect in the first predetermined period (during the reception effect). The Therefore, even if the low expectation effect that the determination result hardly expects to shift to the special gaming state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is actuated. Therefore, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix A11]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is not executed.
The effect execution means (51) is configured to execute the first effect when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area in the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A6 to appendix A10.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A11, even if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlap period, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period. Therefore, even if a low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected in the second predetermined period due to an operation of the movable accessory member or the like, the first effect is executed as scheduled even if it is difficult to awaken. It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first performance while preventing arousal of the game.

[Appendix A12]
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note A6 to Supplementary Note A11, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A12, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, so that the first effect is executed as scheduled, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The arousal for the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the special game state, according to any one of appendix A6 to appendix A12, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13, the specific effect is a confirmed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A14]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, since the specific effect is a rare final effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A15]
Second image display means (391B) different from the image display means (341);
Moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operation position) by the effect execution means (51), and provided with the second image display means (391B). An accessory member (39B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Further comprising
When the movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operation position), the detection means (38A, 38B) Detected and not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operation position), the detection means (38A, 38B). )
The first effect execution means is configured to display the image display means (341) when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) in a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period). ) Execute the first effect (touch operation effect)
The effect limiting means does not limit the execution of the first effect on the image display means (341) in a second overlap period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. A gaming machine according to appendix A0.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A15, the execution of the first effect and the second effect is not restricted by the effect restricting means in the second overlap period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Therefore, even if the predetermined period for executing the first effect and the second predetermined period overlap with the execution period of the second effect, the first effect unnecessarily executed by the second image display means. Is prevented from being executed. Thereby, since it can suppress that the execution frequency of a 1st effect falls extremely, the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

[Appendix A16]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38A) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39A) until the movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B), the game machine according to appendix A15, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, even if the presence of the object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted, so the first effect is executed by erroneous detection through simple processing. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A17]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38A) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39A) until the movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B), limiting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object has been detected.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the detection unit is not executed, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted, so that a false detection is performed by a simple process. This prevents the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A18]
Drive means (39a) for applying a drive force for moving the movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position;
The effect execution means (51) limits the execution of the first effect until the drive of the drive means (39a) is started after the drive means (39a) is determined to be driven. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A15 to appendix A17, characterized by starting.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A19]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) is returned from the second position to the first position. And a return detection means (39b) for detecting this,
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position, the effect restricting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note A15 to Supplementary Note A18, wherein:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, when the return of the movable accessory member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A20]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the image when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A15 to appendix A19, wherein the coverage is greater than the coverage with respect to the display means (341).

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A15 to appendix A20, wherein the movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game effect.

[Appendix A22]
Second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341) are further provided,
The production execution means (51)
When execution of the first effect on the image display means (341) is restricted by the effect limiting means, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed on the second image display means (381B, 392C). The gaming machine according to appendix A0, further comprising: a specific effect execution means for causing the game to be performed.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A22, when the execution of the first effect on the image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlap period, the specific effect different from the first effect on the second image display means by the specific effect execution means. Is executed. This specific effect is executed in the second image display means by detecting the presence of the object in the predetermined area by the detecting means based on the operation of the movable accessory member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display unit by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection unit. Thus, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on erroneous detection in a predetermined period, not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case where

  In addition, since the specific effect is executed by the second image display unit instead of the image display unit by which the first effect is to be executed, the specific effect is executed by the second image display unit which is not anticipated by the player. It can be noted not only what type (expectation) of the effect is executed, but also what image display means the effect is executed. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Appendix A23]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix A22.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, so that the first effect is executed as scheduled, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The arousal for the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A24]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22 or Supplementary Note A23, wherein the specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A24, the specific effect is a confirmed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A25]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix A24, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A25, the specific effect is a rare final effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A26]
The game machine according to any one of appendices A22 to A25, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix A27]
A second movable accessory member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operation position) and which is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B);
The game machine according to any one of appendix A22 to appendix A26, wherein the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26 and Supplementary Note A27, the specific effect is executed on the second image display means provided on the movable accessory member or the second movable accessory member by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. The As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the second position in a predetermined period that causes erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. As a result, the interest of the game can be significantly improved as compared to the case where the movable accessory member is simply operated.

[Appendix A28]
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
Further comprising
The first effect execution unit is configured to display the second image display unit when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection unit (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period). (391B) execute the first effect,
The effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect on the second image display means (391B) in a second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap.
The effect execution means (51) causes the first image display means (392B) to execute the first effect when the execution of the first effect in the second image display means (391B) is restricted during the second overlap period. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, further comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the effect.

[Appendix A29]
A second movable accessory member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operation position) and which is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B); The gaming machine according to appendix A28, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A28 and Supplementary Note A29, when the presence of the object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means in the second overlap period, the first effect is displayed by the second image display means. A specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the third image display means. Thereby, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member which is not anticipated by the player. It is possible to focus attention not only on whether the (expected degree) effect is executed, but also on which image display means the effect is executed. In addition, since the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided in the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. Compared to the case, it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A30]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix A28 or appendix A29, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A30, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, so that the first effect is performed as scheduled, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The arousal for the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A31]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state, according to any one of appendix A28 to appendix A30, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A31, the specific effect is a confirmed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A32]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix A31, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A32, the specific effect is a rare final effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A33]
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
Further comprising
When the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restricting means in the overlap period, the effect executing means (51) is replaced with the first effect. When the second image display means (381B) executes the first specific effect that clearly indicates the predetermined period, and the object is detected in the specific area in the predetermined period, the third image display means (392C) The gaming machine according to appendix A0, further comprising a specific effect executing means for executing a second specific effect different from the first specific effect and the first specific effect.

[Appendix A34]
A second movable accessory member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operation position) and which is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
The gaming machine according to appendix A33, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A34, when the execution of the first effect on the image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlap period, the first specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the first effect. Then, on the condition that the presence of the object in the specific area is detected, the second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect is executed by the third image display means. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is limited. In addition, since the second specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided in the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member is in the first position in the overlap period, the operation of the movable accessory member and the second By combining the two specific effects, the interest of the game can be significantly improved as compared to the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix A35]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The second specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) is shifted to the special gaming state than the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix A33 or appendix A34, characterized in that.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A35, the second specific effect has a higher expectation than the first effect, and therefore, after the operation of the movable accessory member, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game in the game is effectively prevented, and the fun of the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A36]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The game according to Supplementary Note A33 or Supplementary Note A34, wherein the second specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A36, the second specific effect is a confirmed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest in the game is more effectively improved.

[Appendix A37]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the second specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A37, the specific effect is a rare final effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A38]
The movable accessory member (39) is movable between the first position and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position;
The game machine according to appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means enables execution of the first effect when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position during the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A38, the execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period, while the first effect is achieved when the movable accessory member is in the intermediate position. Execution of is not restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member is a touch operation performed by the player, and the movable accessory member is positioned at the intermediate position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first performance from being unnecessarily restricted.

[Appendix A39]
The production execution means (51) is configured to detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area when the detection means (38) detects that the movable accessory member is in the second position during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A38, further comprising specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from one effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A39, when the movable accessory member is in the second position in the predetermined period, if the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means, the first effect executing means performs the first effect. A specific effect different from that is executed. That is, the specific effect is executed using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. As described above, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only the execution of the first effect but also the execution of the first effect is simply limited. Compared with the case where it is done, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A40]
The movable accessory member (39) further includes second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to appendix A39, wherein the specific effect executing means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when execution of the first effect is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A40, the specific effect is executed not by the image display means on which the first effect is to be executed but by the second image display means different from the image display means. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means that the player does not expect, and not only what type (expected degree) of the effect is executed, but also in which image display means the effect is executed. It can also be noted that. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Appendix A41]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix A39 or appendix A40.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A41, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, so that the first movable accessory member is activated after the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game in the game is effectively prevented, and the fun of the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix A42]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A39 or Supplementary A40, wherein the specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A42, since the specific effect is a confirmed effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest in the game is more effectively improved.

[Appendix A43]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix A42, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A43, since the specific effect is a rare final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A44]
The detection means (38)
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) is not detected,
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) is detected. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A44, when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object is detected by the detection means in a predetermined period while preventing the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection. When it is detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix A45]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is operated to the second position, the effect restricting means until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix A38, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A45, even if the presence of the object is detected by the detecting means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted, so the first effect is executed by erroneous detection through simple processing. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A46]
The effect restricting means includes the detecting means (38) in a specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to appendix A38, wherein execution of processing for confirming whether or not the presence of an object has been detected is limited.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A46, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the detection unit is not executed, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted, so that a false detection is performed by a simple process. This prevents the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A47]
Drive means (39a) for applying a drive force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position, and the second position;
The production limiting means is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position, and then the driving means (39a). The game machine according to Supplementary Note A45 or Supplementary Note A46, wherein the restriction on execution of the first effect is started before the start of driving.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A47, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A48]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b);
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position, the effect restricting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. The gaming machine according to appendix A45 or appendix A46, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A48, when the return of the movable accessory member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A49]
The game machine according to appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits execution of the second effect during the overlap period.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A49, the execution of the second effect can be restricted during a predetermined period, so that it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. This can prevent the first performance from being unnecessarily executed.

[Appendix A50]
The game according to appendix A49, wherein the effect restricting means restricts execution of the process of starting the second effect when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A50, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by restricting the execution of the process for starting the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A51]
The second effect executing means, when the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, causes the second effect to be executed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A50.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to appendix A51, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is an end time of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A53]
The gaming machine according to appendix A51 or appendix A52, wherein the time point when the predetermined period has elapsed is an end point of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A51 to Supplementary Note A53, when it is determined that it is time to start the second presentation in the predetermined period, the second presentation is executed when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, while preventing the erroneous detection that the operation on the image display means has been performed by the operation of the movable accessory member, for example, when the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect After the end, a second effect that is generally executed as an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix A54]
The game machine according to appendix A49, wherein the effect execution means (51) restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A54, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by restricting the execution of the process for confirming whether it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix A55]
The first effect is a normal effect having a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) is lower than the normal effect, and the determining means (41 ) Including a rare effect (premier effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state,
The second effect executing means is configured to detect the first effect means by the first effect means when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the predetermined period (touch operation reception period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as an effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) determines that the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of an object in a predetermined area is not detected, the determination result of the second effect is shifted to the special game state by forcible operation of the movable accessory member (39) before the predetermined period has elapsed. It is performed as an effect to clearly show that
The first effect executing means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forcible operation of the movable accessory member (39) by the detecting means (38a to 38d). The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein the rare effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A55, when it is determined that the rare effect is executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means between the start of the predetermined period and the forced operation time elapses. If the presence of is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly actuated before the lapse of a predetermined time. Since the player can be surprised and shocked by the forced operation of the movable accessory member unexpected by the player, the interest and interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, a detection effect is performed using the misdetection by the forced action | operation of a movable accessory member, and it can make a player see a 1st effect reliably. In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A55, since the rare effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to be shifted to the special game state is executed as the first effect, the rare effect is caused by the erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member. When a rare effect that is rarely seen by execution is determined as a detection effect, it is possible not only to show the rare effect to the player, but also an unexpected movable accessory member In addition to the operation of, a rare effect is executed, so that the player can be further surprised and shocked. Thereby, the interest and interest of a game can be improved further.

[Appendix A56]
A game state transition unit (41) for shifting the game state between the notification game state in which the notification game for notifying the determination result in the determination unit (41) and the special game state is provided;
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state includes a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variable jackpot game state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state and a second notification gaming state that has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) than the first notification gaming state. ,
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the first special game, shifts to the second notification gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The rare effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result in the determination means (41) is shifted to the second special game state by the game state transition means (41) after the notification game is ended. The gaming machine according to appendix A55, characterized by being:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A56, the rare effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means is to shift to the (second) special game state ((probability change) jackpot game state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the state is shifted to the (second) special game state ((probability change) jackpot game state) by erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. Thus, the player can know that the determination result is advantageous when the rare effect is executed after the forced action of the movable accessory member before the notification game is finished, so that the interest and interest in the game Can be improved.

[Appendix A57]
The game machine according to Supplementary Note A55 or Supplementary Note A56, wherein the production restriction means restricts execution of the second production when the first production is not the rare production.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A57, when the first effect is not a rare effect, the execution of the second effect in the overlap period is restricted by the effect restricting means. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will due to erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A58]
When it is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position) and is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the detection means (38a- A second movable accessory member (39B) not detected by 38d),
The second effect executing means executes a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the second movable accessory member (39B) between the third position and the fourth position,
The production restriction means can restrict the execution of the second production by the movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second production execution means during the overlap period, and the second movable combination member ( 39. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein the execution of the second effect according to 39B) is not limited.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A58, the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be restricted during a predetermined period, so that a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means based on the operation of the first movable accessory member Thus, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that the player has performed an operation.

  Further, when the second movable accessory member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detection means. Therefore, since the erroneous detection in the detection means does not occur due to the operation of the second movable accessory member, it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member from causing no erroneous detection from being unnecessarily limited. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from being monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory effect from being excessively limited, and to suppress a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix A59]
When it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member during the predetermined period, the effect restricting unit restricts execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The gaming machine according to appendix A58, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A59, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period, the operation of starting the first movable accessory member is performed. By restricting the execution, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first movable accessory effect in the predetermined period, and therefore it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A60]
In the case where the timing for starting the first movable accessory effect is the predetermined period, the effect restricting means is configured to cause the second movable member member to perform the second operation when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A59, wherein an effect is executed.

[Appendix A61]
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein the time when the certain period has elapsed is an end time of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A62]
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein the time point when the predetermined period has elapsed is an end time point of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A60 to Supplementary Note A62, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member within a predetermined period, A second effect by one movable accessory member is executed. Therefore, while preventing the erroneous detection that the operation on the image display means has been performed by the operation of the first movable accessory member, for example, the predetermined period or the first period after the predetermined period has elapsed. When the second effect by the first movable accessory member, which is generally executed as an effect with a high degree of expectation, is executed after the effect ends, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix A63]
The production restriction means restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the second production by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A63, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is limited by restricting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A64]
The coverage with respect to the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the same as when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A58 to appendix A63, wherein the coverage is larger than the coverage with respect to the image display means (341).

[Appendix A65]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A58 to A64, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game effect. .

[Appendix A66]
The production limiting means can limit the execution of the second production when the predetermined period starts before the overlap period, and when the execution period starts before the overlap period. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein execution of the first effect can be restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A66, when the predetermined period is started before the overlap period, the execution of the second effect is restricted, so that the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the operation of the movable accessory member. When the means is prevented from being erroneously detected and the execution period of the first effect is limited when the execution period starts before the overlapping period, the object is placed in the predetermined region by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is prevented that the detection means erroneously detects the presence. Therefore, in the case where the predetermined period overlaps with the execution period of the second effect, the operation of the movable accessory member is performed regardless of whether the predetermined period starts first or the execution period starts first. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection based on the detection effect, and it is possible to prevent detection effects from being executed unnecessarily based on erroneous detection.

[Appendix B1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (a jackpot game state) based on establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position) and is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). A movable accessory member (39) to be played;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
With
An effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) causes the second effect to shift to the special gaming state in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. When executing as a jackpot finalizing effect or one-shot notification effect), if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d), the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected. A gaming machine that executes the game effect of a type corresponding to the situation of the case.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected when an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to be shifted to the special gaming state in the overlap period is detected, A type of game effect corresponding to the situation when the presence of the object is detected is executed. Therefore, the execution of the first effect can be restricted throughout the game effects in a situation where game arousal is likely to occur. Thereby, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved. In addition, in a situation where it is difficult for the game to awaken, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so that the first effect can be prevented from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix B2]
When the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected when the detection unit (38a to 38d) detects the presence of the object in the predetermined region during the overlap period, the effect executing unit (51) The game machine according to appendix B1, wherein an effect according to a type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix B3]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (variable game effect) executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the player of the determination result in the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) that is executed from the start time of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the basic effect ends, and the first development effect. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The production execution means (51)
An effect restriction that restricts execution of the first effect when the second development effect is being executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the overlap period. Means,
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the first effect when the execution of the first effect is limited by the effect limiting means;
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, further comprising:

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B2 and Supplementary Note B3, an effect according to the type of the game effect being executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlap period. For example, when the game effect being executed when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlap period is a second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, even if the low expectation effect that the determination result hardly expects to shift to the special gaming state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is actuated. Therefore, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
The first effect execution means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the overlap period. The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, even if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the overlap period, the first effect is executed if the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed. The first effect is executed by the means. For this reason, even when a low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected during the overlap period due to operation of a movable accessory member, etc., the first effect is executed as scheduled, so that the game It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first performance while preventing the awakening of the first effect.

[Appendix B5]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (a third touch operation reception period, a fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (a touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is being executed,
The effect execution means (51) executes the first effect by the effect restriction means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. The game machine according to Supplementary Note B3 or Supplementary Note B4, wherein the specific effect execution unit executes a specific effect different from the first effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect), the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restriction means. A specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, in the case where the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect in the first predetermined period (during the reception effect). The Therefore, even if the low expectation effect that the determination result hardly expects to shift to the special gaming state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is actuated. Therefore, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix B6]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is not executed.
The effect execution means (51) is configured to execute the first effect when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area in the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B5.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, even if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlap period, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period. Therefore, even if a low expectation effect is executed, even if an object is detected in the second predetermined period due to an operation of the movable accessory member or the like, the first effect is executed as scheduled even if it is difficult to awaken. It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first performance while preventing arousal of the game.

[Appendix B7]
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B6, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, so that the first effect is performed as scheduled, and therefore after the operation of the movable accessory member, The arousal for the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix B8]
The specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the special game state, according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B7, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B8, since the specific effect is a confirmed effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix B9]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix B8, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B9, since the specific effect is a rare final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix C1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (a jackpot game state) based on establishment of the determination condition;
A game state transition means (41) for shifting a game state between a notification game state in which a notification game for notifying a determination result in the determination means (41) and the special game state;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position) and is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). A movable accessory member (39) to be played;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area in a predetermined period (touch operation reception period). ,
The determination result in the determination means (41) is shifted to the special game state by moving the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position in the predetermined period. When the expectation improvement effect (chance increase effect) for improving the expectation level of the object is executed, the movable object is generated in the predetermined area by the detection means (38a to 38d) by executing the expectation improvement effect. A game characterized in that, when the presence of a member is detected, it is possible to execute a definite effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment C1, when the presence of the movable accessory member in the predetermined area is detected by executing the expectation improvement effect in which the movable accessory member operates, the final effect can be executed. It is. That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the operation of the movable accessory member, even if it is erroneously detected that it is due to the player's action by the player, A definite effect is executed using false detection. In other words, the problem that arousal may occur due to the execution of the first effect with a low expectation to be shifted to the special game state after the operation of the movable accessory member is solved by using false detection as a reverse hand. be able to.

[Appendix C2]
The effect execution means (51) executes the determined effect when the predetermined effect is executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, wherein the gaming machine is possible.

[Appendix C3]
The game effect includes a notification game effect (variable game effect) executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the player of the determination result in the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) that is executed from the start time of the notification game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the basic effect ends, and the first development effect. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the predetermined effect is the second development effect.

  In the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes C2 and C3, when a predetermined effect (for example, the second development effect) is being executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in a predetermined period, the final effect is executed. Can be done. That is, in the case where the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the definite effect can be executed while the predetermined effect such as the second development effect is being executed. Therefore, even if the low expectation effect that the determination result hardly expects to shift to the special gaming state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is actuated. Therefore, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (a third touch operation reception period, a fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (a touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is being executed,
The effect execution means (51) can execute the final effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C3, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect), the final effect can be executed. That is, in the case where the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the definite effect can be executed in the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect). Therefore, even if the low expectation effect that the determination result hardly expects to shift to the special gaming state is determined as the first effect, the low expectation effect is executed after the movable accessory member is actuated. Therefore, the arousal for the game is prevented and the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The finalized effect is an effect executed after the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position, and the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C4, wherein the game machine is an effect involving movement (final effect B).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, after the operation of the movable accessory member is finished, the effect accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory is executed again as the confirmed effect. That is, the definite effect is executed as the second act of actuating operating member operation of the act of actuating operating movable member that is continuously executed. Therefore, the finalized effect is executed as an unexpected effect. In addition, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member is actuated again after the movable accessory member is returned. Thereby, even after the end of the movable accessory member effect, the player can be kept interested in the effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C6]
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state includes a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variable jackpot game state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
When the expectation improvement effect is executed by moving the movable accessory member (39), the effect executing means (51) moves the movable accessory member (39) from the first position. When the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) triggered by the movement to the second position, the determination result by the determination means (41) is the second special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C5, wherein the finalized effect is executed on the condition that the transition is to be performed.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C6, a definite effect is executed on the condition that the determination result is a transition to the second special game state in which the second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is executed. Is done. For example, the determination result is shifted to the second special gaming state in which the probability that the determination unit determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that of the first notification game to the second special game state that is transferred after the special game ends. On the condition that it is, the definite production is executed. For this reason, if the player performs a definite effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the movement of the movable accessory member, the determination result is from the first special gaming state. Since it can be known that the game is shifted to the second special game state advantageous to the player, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C6, wherein the finalized effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, since the finalized effect is a rare finalized effect, it can be easily known that the determination result is to shift to the second special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game state. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
A first movable accessory member (39A) moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operation position);
A second movable accessory member (39B) provided between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position) and provided with the second image display means (391B);
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operation position), the first detection means (38A) , 38B) and not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operation position), the first detection means (38A) , 38B)
The production execution means (51)
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) in the first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), and in the second predetermined period (touch operation reception period) First effect execution means for causing the first image display means (341) to execute a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D); ,
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the first movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is limited in a first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, and the second predetermined period and the Production limiting means that does not restrict execution of the first production in the first image display means (341) in a second overlapping period in which the execution period of the second production overlaps;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D1, execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect restricting means in the first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Is done. Therefore, when it is detected by the first detection means that an object is present in the predetermined area, the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the player's action. Inconvenience can be prevented. On the other hand, the performance limiting means does not limit the execution of the first performance and the second performance in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second performance overlap. Therefore, even if the predetermined period for executing the first effect (the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period) overlaps with the execution period of the second effect, the second image display means is unnecessary. Execution of the first effect to be executed is prevented. Thereby, since it can suppress that the execution frequency of a 1st effect falls extremely, the fall of the interest of a game can be suppressed.

[Appendix D2]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the first movable accessory member (39A) is actuated until the first movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting means The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, since the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted even when the presence of the object is detected by the first detection means, the first effect is caused by erroneous detection by a simple process. It can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix D3]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the first movable accessory member (39A) is actuated until the first movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting means The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein execution of processing for confirming whether or not the presence of an object has been detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D3, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the first detection means is not executed, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted, so that the simple process It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix D4]
Drive means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the first movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position;
The effect execution means (51) limits the execution of the first effect until the drive of the drive means (39a) is started after the drive means (39a) is determined to be driven. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D3, which is characterized by starting.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D4, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the first movable accessory member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member can be reliably prevented.

[Appendix D5]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) is returned from the second position to the first position. And a return detection means (39b) for detecting this,
The production restriction means restricts execution of the first production when the return detection means (39b) detects that the first movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D4, wherein the game machine is released.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D5, when the return of the first movable accessory member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member can be reliably prevented.

[Appendix D6]
The coverage of the first image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is in the second position is such that the second movable accessory member (39B) is in the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D5, wherein the coverage is larger than the coverage of the first image display means (341).

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D6, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game effect. .

[Appendix E1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341);
Detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When moving between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position) and moving between the first position and the second position, the detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B), a movable accessory member (39A, 39C) detected by
Effect execution means (51) for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B, 392C) and the movable accessory member (39A, 39C) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) in a predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first effect (on the first image display means (341)) First effect executing means for executing a touch operation effect);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39, 39C) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for restricting execution of the first production in the first image display means (341) in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
When execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means, a specific effect different from the first effect is given to the second image display means (381B, 392C). Specific production execution means to be executed,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlap period. Therefore, when the detection means detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, there is a disadvantage that the first effect is executed due to erroneous detection that the object is based on the player's action. It can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlap period, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed on the second image display means by the specific effect execution means. . This specific effect is executed in the second image display means by detecting the presence of the object in the predetermined area by the detecting means based on the operation of the movable accessory member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display unit by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection unit. Thus, by executing the specific effect instead of the first effect based on erroneous detection in a predetermined period, not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted, but also the execution of the first effect is simply restricted. It is possible to improve the interest of the game compared to the case where

  In addition, the specific effect is executed by the second image display unit that is not anticipated by the player, because the specific effect is executed by the second image display unit instead of the first image display unit in which the first effect is to be executed. Therefore, it can be noted not only what type (expectation) of the effect is executed, but also what image display means the effect is executed. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Appendix E2]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix E1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E2, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, and therefore, after the first movable accessory member is actuated, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game in the game is effectively prevented, and the fun of the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix E3]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1 or supplementary note E2, wherein the specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, the specific effect is a confirmed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest in the game is more effectively improved.

[Appendix E4]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix E3, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E4, since the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is further enhanced as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest in the game is further improved effectively.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E4, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the first movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix E6]
A second movable accessory member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operation position) and which is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E4, wherein the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E5 and Supplementary Note E6, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means provided on the movable accessory member or the second movable accessory member by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. The As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the second position in a predetermined period that causes erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. As a result, the interest of the game can be significantly improved as compared to the case where the movable accessory member is simply operated.

[Appendix F1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
The first detecting means (38A, 38B) is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A movable accessory member (39A) detected by
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
Execution of an effect that causes the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game. Means (51);
With
The production execution means (51)
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) during a first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first effect is displayed on the first image display means (341). And when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the second image display means (391B) First effect executing means for executing one effect;
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is limited in a first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, and the second predetermined period and the Production limiting means for restricting execution of the first production on the second image display means (391B) in a second overlapping period overlapping with the execution period of the second production;
When the execution of the first effect on the second image display means (391B) is restricted during the second overlapping period, the third image display means (392B) is caused to execute a specific effect different from the first effect. Specific production execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix F2]
The second movable accessory member (39B) which is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position) and is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is further provided. The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 and Supplementary Note F2, it is possible to restrict execution of the first effect on the first image display means in the first overlap period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap by the effect restriction means. It is. Therefore, when it is detected by the first detection means that an object is present in the predetermined area, the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the action of the player. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection unit during the second overlap period, the first image is displayed by the third image display unit instead of executing the first effect by the second image display unit. A specific effect different from the effect is executed. Thereby, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member which is not anticipated by the player. It is possible to focus attention not only on whether the (expected degree) effect is executed, but also on which image display means the effect is executed. In addition, since the specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided in the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. Compared to the case, it is possible to greatly improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix F3]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F3, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, so that the first effect is performed as scheduled, and therefore after the operation of the movable accessory member, The arousal for the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix F4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special gaming state, according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F4, since the specific effect is a confirmed effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effectively performed than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix F5]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix F4, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F5, since the specific effect is a rare final effect, the awakening of the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix G1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
First image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341);
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
When moving between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position) and moving between the first position and the second position, the first detecting means ( 38A, 38B) and a movable accessory member (39A) detected by
Unlike the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A);
Execution of an effect that causes the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game. Means (51);
With
The production execution means (51)
When the detection means (38A, 38B) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the first effect (touch operation effect) is displayed on the first image display means (341). First effect executing means for executing
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for restricting execution of the first production in the first image display means (341) in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
When execution of the first effect in the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlap period, the second image display means (381B) replaces the first effect. A first specific effect that clearly indicates the predetermined period is executed, and when an object is detected in the specific area in the predetermined period, the first effect and the first specific are displayed on the third image display means (392C). Specific production execution means for executing a second specific production different from the production;
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix G2]
The second movable accessory member (39B) which is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position) and is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is further provided. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes G1 and G2, the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted in the overlap period by the effect restriction means. Therefore, when it is detected by the first detection means that an object is present in the predetermined area, the first effect is executed because it is erroneously detected as being based on the action of the player. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted in the overlap period by the effect restriction means, the first specific effect is executed on the second image display means instead of the first effect, and the specification A second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect is executed by the third image display means on condition that the presence of an object in the area is detected. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is limited. In addition, since the second specific effect is executed in the third image display means provided in the movable accessory member when the movable accessory member is in the first position in the overlap period, the operation of the movable accessory member and the second By combining the two specific effects, the interest of the game can be significantly improved as compared to the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix G3]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The second specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) is shifted to the special gaming state than the first effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1 or Supplementary G2, which is characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, the second specific effect has a higher expectation than the first effect, and therefore, after the operation of the movable accessory member, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The awakening of the game in the game is effectively prevented, and the fun of the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix G4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The game according to Supplementary Note G1 or Supplementary Note G2, wherein the second specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the special game state. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the second specific effect is a confirmed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest in the game is more effectively improved.

[Appendix G5]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix G4, wherein the second specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, since the specific effect is a rare final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix H1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
Moved between a first position (standby position), a second position (operating position), and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and between the first position and the second position. A movable accessory member (39) that is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when being moved between,
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
A second effect of moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the second position, the first position, and the second position (movable accessory member operation effect) is executed. Production execution means;
In the predetermined period, execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position, and when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the first effect is limited. Production limiting means for enabling execution of one production;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H1, the execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period, while the first effect is achieved when the movable accessory member is in the intermediate position. Execution of is not restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member is a touch operation performed by the player, and the movable accessory member is positioned at the intermediate position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first performance from being unnecessarily restricted.

[Appendix H2]
The production execution means (51) is configured to detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area when the detection means (38) detects that the movable accessory member is in the second position during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix H1, further comprising specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from the one effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H2, if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means when the movable accessory member is at the second position in the predetermined period, the first effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. A specific effect different from that is executed. That is, the specific effect is executed using the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. As described above, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only the execution of the first effect but also the execution of the first effect is simply limited. Compared with the case where it is done, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix H3]
The movable accessory member (39) further includes second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to appendix H2, wherein the specific effect execution means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when execution of the first effect is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H3, the specific effect is executed not by the image display means on which the first effect is to be executed but by the second image display means different from the image display means. Therefore, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means that the player does not expect, and not only what type (expected degree) of the effect is executed, but also in which image display means the effect is executed. It can also be noted that. Thereby, since it can suppress that interest with respect to a game fades, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Appendix H4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (a jackpot expectation) that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2 or Supplementary Note H3.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the specific effect is relatively higher in expectation than the first effect, so that the first effect is performed as scheduled, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. The arousal for the game is effectively prevented, and the interest for the game is effectively improved.

[Appendix H5]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, further comprises a determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2 or Supplementary Note H3, wherein the specific effect is a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to be shifted to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, since the specific effect is a final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. And the interest in the game is more effectively improved.

[Appendix H6]
The confirmed effect includes a normal confirmed effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) and a rare fixed effect (premier effect) with a probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) being lower than the normal determined effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to appendix H5, wherein the specific effect is the rare finalized effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H6, since the specific effect is a rare final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is further enhanced as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest in the game is further improved effectively.

[Appendix H7]
The detection means (38)
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) is not detected,
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) is detected. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix H7, when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the presence of an object is detected by the detection means in a predetermined period while preventing the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection. When it is detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix H8]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is operated to the second position, the effect restricting means until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38), execution of the first effect is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H8, even if the presence of the object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted, so the first effect is executed by erroneous detection through simple processing. Can be prevented.

[Appendix H9]
The effect restricting means includes the detecting means (38) in a specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein execution of processing for confirming whether or not the presence of an object has been detected is limited.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the detection unit is not executed, the execution of the first effect in a specific period can be restricted, so that a false detection is performed by a simple process. This prevents the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix H10]
Drive means (39a) for applying a drive force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the intermediate position, and the second position;
The production limiting means is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position, and then the driving means (39a). The game machine according to Supplementary Note H8 or Supplementary Note H9, wherein restriction of execution of the first effect is started before the start of driving.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H11]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b);
When the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position, the effect restricting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8 or Supplementary Note H9, wherein:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H11, when the return of the movable accessory member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix I1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position) and is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). A movable accessory member (39) to be played;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for limiting execution of the second production in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I1, since the execution of the second effect can be limited during a predetermined period, it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. This can prevent the first performance from being unnecessarily executed.

[Appendix I2]
The game according to appendix I1, wherein the performance limiting means limits the execution of the process of starting the second performance when it is determined that it is time to start the second performance in the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I2, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in a predetermined period, the execution of the process for starting the second effect is restricted to restrict the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix I3]
The second effect executing means, when the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, causes the second effect to be executed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix I2.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is an end time of the predetermined period.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3 or appendix I4, wherein the time when the certain period has elapsed is an end point of the first production when the first production is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I3 to Supplementary Note I5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second production in the predetermined period, the second production is executed when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, while preventing the erroneous detection that the operation on the image display means has been performed by the operation of the movable accessory member, for example, when the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect After the end, a second effect that is generally executed as an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix I6]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the performance executing means (51) restricts execution of processing for confirming whether or not it is time to start the second performance in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I6, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be limited by limiting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix J1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position) and is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). A movable accessory member (39) to be played;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
With
The first effect is a normal effect having a high probability of being executed by the first effect executing means, and a probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) is lower than the normal effect, and the determining means (41 ) Including a rare effect (premier effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special gaming state,
The second effect executing means is configured to detect the first effect means by the first effect means when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during the predetermined period (touch operation reception period). When it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as an effect, the detection means (38a to 38d) determines that the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of an object in a predetermined area is not detected, the determination result of the second effect is shifted to the special game state by forcible operation of the movable accessory member (39) before the predetermined period has elapsed. It is performed as an effect to clearly show that
The first effect executing means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forcible operation of the movable accessory member (39) by the detecting means (38a to 38d). A gaming machine, wherein the rare effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment J1, when it is determined that the rare effect is executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detecting means from the start of the predetermined period until the forced operation time elapses. If the presence of is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly actuated before the lapse of a predetermined time. Since the player can be surprised and shocked by the forced operation of the movable accessory member unexpected by the player, the interest and interest of the game can be improved. Moreover, a detection effect is performed using the misdetection by the forced action | operation of a movable accessory member, and it can make a player see a 1st effect reliably. In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J1, since a rare effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to be shifted to the special gaming state is executed as the first effect, the rare effect is caused by an erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member. When a rare effect that is rarely seen by execution is determined as a detection effect, it is possible not only to show the rare effect to the player, but also an unexpected movable accessory member In addition to the operation of, a rare effect is executed, so that the player can be further surprised and shocked. Thereby, the interest and interest of a game can be improved further.

[Appendix J2]
A game state transition unit (41) for shifting the game state between the notification game state in which the notification game for notifying the determination result in the determination unit (41) and the special game state is provided;
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state includes a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variable jackpot game state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The notification gaming state includes a first notification gaming state and a second notification gaming state that has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state by the determination means (41) than the first notification gaming state. ,
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the first notification gaming state after the end of the first special game, shifts to the second notification gaming state after the end of the second special game,
The rare effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result in the determination means (41) is shifted to the second special game state by the game state transition means (41) after the notification game is ended. The gaming machine according to appendix J1, characterized by being:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J2, the rare effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means is to be transferred to the (second) special game state ((probability change) jackpot game state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the state is shifted to the (second) special game state ((probability change) jackpot game state) by erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. Thus, the player can know that the determination result is advantageous when the rare effect is executed after the forced action of the movable accessory member before the notification game is finished, so that the interest and interest in the game Can be improved.

[Appendix J3]
The game machine according to supplementary note J1 or supplementary note J2, wherein the production restriction means restricts execution of the second production when the first production is not the rare production.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J3, when the first effect is not a rare effect, the execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect restricting means. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will due to erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
The detection means (38a to 38a) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operation position) and moved between the first position and the second position. A first movable accessory member (39A) detected by 38d);
When it is moved between the third position (second standby position) and the fourth position (second operation position) and is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the detection means (38a- A second movable accessory member (39B) not detected by 38d);
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
The first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position and the second position, or the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position and the fourth position. Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) to be moved between,
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second effect execution means can be restricted. There is an effect limiting means that does not limit the execution of the second effect by the second movable accessory member (39B),
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note K1, since the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be restricted during a predetermined period, a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means based on the operation of the first movable accessory member Thus, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that the player has performed an operation.

  Further, when the second movable accessory member is moved between the third position and the fourth position, the object is not detected by the detection means. Therefore, since the erroneous detection in the detection means does not occur due to the operation of the second movable accessory member, it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member from causing no erroneous detection from being unnecessarily limited. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from being monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory effect from being excessively limited, and to suppress a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix K2]
When it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member during the predetermined period, the effect restricting unit restricts execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The gaming machine according to appendix K1, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K2, the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period. By restricting the execution, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first movable accessory effect in the predetermined period, and therefore it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix K3]
In the case where the timing for starting the first movable accessory effect is the predetermined period, the effect restricting means is configured to cause the second movable member member to perform the second operation when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K2, wherein the production is executed.

[Appendix K4]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note K3, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is an end time of the predetermined period.

[Appendix K5]
The gaming machine according to appendix K3, wherein the time when the certain period has elapsed is an end time of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes K3 to K5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period, the first time is reached when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the predetermined period. A second effect by one movable accessory member is executed. Therefore, while preventing the erroneous detection that the operation on the image display means has been performed by the operation of the first movable accessory member, for example, the predetermined period or the first period after the predetermined period has elapsed. When the second effect by the first movable accessory member, which is generally executed as an effect with a high degree of expectation, is executed after the effect ends, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix K6]
The said production | presentation limitation means restrict | limits execution of the process which confirms whether it is a timing which starts the said 2nd production by the said 1st movable accessory member in the said predetermined period, The additional note K1 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K6, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is limited by restricting the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix K7]
The coverage with respect to the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the same as when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note K1 to Supplementary Note K6, which is larger than a coverage with respect to the image display means (341).

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix K1 to appendix K7, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operating frequencies in the game effect. .

[Appendix L1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting the object when the object is present in a predetermined region on the front side of the image display means (341);
When it is moved between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operation position) and is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d). A movable accessory member (39) to be played;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
With
The production execution means (51)
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the detection means (38a to 38d) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period (touch operation reception period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for restricting execution of one of the first production and the second production in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
The production restriction means can restrict the execution of the second production when the predetermined period is started before the overlap period, and the execution period is started before the overlap period. In this case, the execution of the first effect can be restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L1, when the predetermined period is started before the overlap period, the execution of the second effect is restricted to detect the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the operation of the movable accessory member When the means is prevented from being erroneously detected and the execution period of the first effect is limited when the execution period starts before the overlapping period, the object is placed in the predetermined region by the operation of the movable accessory member. It is prevented that the detection means erroneously detects the presence. Therefore, in the case where the predetermined period overlaps with the execution period of the second effect, the operation of the movable accessory member is performed regardless of whether the predetermined period starts first or the execution period starts first. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection based on the detection effect, and it is possible to prevent detection effects from being executed unnecessarily based on erroneous detection.

[Appendix L2]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38a) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. The gaming machine according to appendix L1, wherein the execution of the first effect is limited when the presence of an object is detected by ~ 38d).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L2, even if the presence of the object is detected by the detection means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix L3]
The production restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38a to 38a) in a specific period from when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (39) until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the standby position. The gaming machine according to appendix L1, wherein execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object has been detected in 38d) is limited.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note L3, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the detection unit in the specific period is not executed, the execution of the detection effect in the overlap period can be limited, so that the simple process It is possible to prevent detection effects from being executed due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix L4]
Drive means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
The effect limiting means starts limiting the execution of the first effect after it is determined to drive the drive means (39a) until the drive of the drive means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note L1 to Supplementary Note L3, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment L4, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is actuated by the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L5]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the first position to the second position. A return detection means (39b);
The effect restricting means removes the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note L1 to Supplementary Note L4, wherein:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L5, when the return of the movable accessory member is detected, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is released. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L6]
Any one of the supplementary notes L1 to L5, characterized in that, when it is determined that it is time to start the second production in the predetermined period, the production restriction unit restricts execution of the process of starting the second production. The gaming machine described in Crab.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L6, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the execution of the process for starting the second effect is restricted to restrict the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix L7]
The game according to any one of Supplementary Note L1 to Supplementary Note L5, wherein the production restriction unit restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the movable accessory production in the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix L7, the execution of the movable accessory effect during the reception period can be limited by restricting the execution of the process for confirming whether it is the timing to start the movable accessory effect during the reception period. It is possible to prevent detection effects from being executed due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix M1]
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means (341) for displaying a variation display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) is variably displayed;
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting an object in the first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when there is an object in a second predetermined area at least partially different from the first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341). )When,
An object is present in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area based on both the detection result of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the detection result of the second detection means (38C, 38D). First judging means (51) for judging whether or not to do;
Second judgment means for judging whether or not an object exists based on one of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when a specific condition is satisfied. (51),
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M1, the presence of the object is determined by the first determination unit based on the detection results of both the first detection unit and the second detection unit, but when a specific condition is satisfied, The second determination means determines whether or not an object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, even if a failure may occur by referring to the detection results of both the first detection unit and the second detection unit, the object is detected based on one detection unit. By determining the presence, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not an object exists while preventing occurrence of a problem.

[Appendix M2]
A movable accessory member (39) moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position) set in the first predetermined area;
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the first position, the first determination means (51) is connected to the first detection means (38C, 38D) and the second detection means (38C, 38D). Based on whether to detect the presence of an object in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area,
The second determination means (51) is based on the second detection means (38C, 38D), assuming that the specific condition is satisfied when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position. The game machine according to appendix M1, wherein it is determined whether or not an object exists in the second predetermined area.

[Appendix M3]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved between the first position and the second position, it is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B), and the second detection means (38C, 38D), the gaming machine according to appendix M2, wherein the gaming machine is not detected.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment M3, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the presence or absence of an object in the first predetermined area based on the first detection unit is not determined, and based on the second detection unit It is determined whether or not an object exists in the second predetermined area. Therefore, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable accessory member from being erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Even when the movable accessory member is operating, it can be determined whether or not the player has performed a touch operation on the second predetermined area. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the touch effect based on the player's touch operation outside the operation region of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix M4]
The movable accessory member (39) is moved by the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when moved between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine according to attachment M2, wherein the gaming machine is detected.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment M4, for example, when a game is in progress, even if one of the first detection means and the second detection means fails, it can be detected that the movable accessory member is in the second position. . When checking the operation of the movable accessory member when the main power source of the gaming machine is turned on, it is checked that the movable accessory member is at the second position only by the detection result of the first detection means. On the contrary, by checking that the movable accessory member is in the second position only by the detection result of the second detection means, it is checked whether the first detection means and the second detection means are out of order. It becomes possible.

[Appendix M5]
It further includes an effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the progress of the game,
The production execution means (51)
A first effect (touch operation effect, alternative touch operation effect) triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area or the presence of an object in the second predetermined area in a predetermined period (touch operation reception period) First effect executing means for executing
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In the overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, execution of the first effect can be restricted when an object is present in the first predetermined region, and the second predetermined Production limiting means for enabling execution of the first production triggered by the presence of an object in the area;
The gaming machine according to attachment M3, comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment M5, an object is placed in the first predetermined area in the execution period of the second effect by the movable accessory member detected by the first detection means when moved between the first position and the second position. Execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of is limited by the effect limiting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to erroneous detection that the operation of the movable accessory member is a touch operation performed by the player. On the other hand, when an object exists in the second predetermined area outside the detection range of the first detection means, the second detection means detects the presence of the object even during the execution period of the second effect. One effect is executed without restriction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first performance from being executed unnecessarily, and to suppress the frequency of execution of the first performance from being extremely reduced.

[Appendix M6]
The production restriction means restricts execution of processing for confirming whether or not the presence of an object has been detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) during the overlap period, according to Supplementary Note M5. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M6, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object has been detected by the first detection unit in the overlap period is not executed, the execution of the first effect in the overlap period can be limited, and thus simple. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by simple processing.

[Appendix M7]
The supplementary effect M6 is described in the supplementary note M6, wherein when the presence of an object is detected by the first detection unit (38A, 38B) during the overlap period, the execution of the first presentation is restricted. Game machines.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment M7, even if the presence of the object is detected by the detecting means, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted. Therefore, the first effect is caused by erroneous detection by a simple process in the overlap period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix M8]
The first effect execution means displays the first effect when the presence of an object in the second predetermined area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during the overlap period. 341) The game machine according to any one of appendix M5 to appendix M7, wherein the game machine is executed in an area corresponding to the second predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M8, since the first effect executed by the image display means can be prevented from being restricted, the execution of the first effect by other effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp) is restricted. Compared to the above, it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in interest due to the limited execution of the first effect.

[Appendix M9]
A second image display means (391B) disposed at a position corresponding to the second predetermined area and different from the first image display means (341);
The first effect executing means is configured to change the second predetermined area when the execution of the first effect is triggered by the presence of an object in the first predetermined area in the overlap period by the effect restricting means. When the presence of an object is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D), the first effect is caused to be executed by the second image display means. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M9, when the second image display means is provided, the first effect executed by the second image display means can be prevented from being restricted, and therefore other effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp). As compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is restricted, it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in interest due to the restriction of the execution of the first effect.

[Appendix M10]
The specific condition is that the presence of an object in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area is detected by one of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes M1 to M9, wherein the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be performed.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment M10, whether the object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means by the second determination means when the first detection means or the second detection means is out of order. It is determined whether or not. For this reason, even when the first detection means or the second detection means is out of order, the presence of an object, for example, a touch operation on a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means is performed by the detection means that is not out of order. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix M11]
The specific condition is that an operation check of the first detection means (38A, 38B) or the second detection means (38C, 38D) is performed, and any one of the supplementary notes M1 to M10, The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment M11, when the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means is performed, an object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means by the second determination means. It is determined whether or not to do so. Thereby, it can be judged whether one of the 1st detection means and the 2nd detection means is out of order. Here, the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means includes, for example, an operation check executed when the main power supply is turned on. Further, the operation chuck can be performed during the progress of the game. For example, when the movable accessory member is moved to the second position, it is determined whether or not the object is present by the second determination unit based on the detection result of one of the first detection unit and the second detection unit. By determining, it is possible to check whether one of the first detection means and the second detection means is normally operated. The operation check in the supplementary note M11 includes not only an operation check executed when the main power is turned on, but also an operation check performed when the game progresses.

10: gaming machine 25: panel 38: detection sensor 38a: upper left detection sensor 38b: lower left detection sensor 38c: upper right detection sensor 38d: lower right detection sensor 38A: first main detection sensor 38B: second main detection sensor 38C: first Sub detection sensor 38D: Second sub detection sensor 38E: Sub detection sensor 341: Symbol display portions 39, 39C: Movable accessory member 392C: Display portion 39A: Main movable accessory member 392A: Display portion 39B: Sub movable accessory member 391B: Display unit 39a: Motor 39a1: First motor 39a2: Second motor 39b: Return detection unit 39c: Motor driver 4: Main controller 41: MPU
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Image display means for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner;
Detection means that is in a predetermined detection state when an object is present in a predetermined area that is in front of the image display means;
A movable member displaced between a first position and a second position;
Displacement means for displacing the movable member;
With
When the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the detection means can be in the predetermined detection state,
Effect execution means for causing the image display means to execute a game effect in the progress of the game;
Further comprising
The production execution means
First effect execution means for executing a corresponding first effect when the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the displacement means;
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect when the detection means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area during a predetermined period;
With
The gaming machine is limited so that the first performance is not executed in the predetermined period.